JP2020028789A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To preferably display a diversified performance image.SOLUTION: A game machine can control a state to an advantageous state which is advantageous to a player and comprises: decision means for deciding whether or not to control a state to the advantageous state; determination means for determining whether or not the state is controlled to the advantageous state before decision of the decision means; and performance execution means for executing a performance using a performance image. The performance execution means can execute a first performance using a first performance image in a first region, and a second performance using a second performance image which has a high priority of a display relative to that of the first performance image in a second region wider than the first region, and executes processing for displaying the first performance image even when the second performance is executed, and displays the second performance image on a near side.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize game media such as prize balls are obtained. Some are given to players. Further, a variable display device is provided which is capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) identification information when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is satisfied). In some cases, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player.

  Further, as the above-described gaming machine, a gaming machine that displays an image of a decorative pattern and a character image in accordance with a predetermined priority is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-13377

  However, there is a possibility that diversified effect images cannot be displayed properly.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately display diversified effect images.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a specific display unit that displays a specific display corresponding to a variable display. Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state; determining means for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determining means; and an effect of executing an effect using the effect image Execution means, wherein the specific display includes a hold display and a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display being executed, and the specific display can be changed to a highly expected mode controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of the timing at which the mode of the specific display changes depends on the mode of the variable display. When the mode of the hold display changes, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher, and the effect execution The means is a first area A first effect using the first effect image, and a second effect using a second effect image having a higher display priority than the first effect image in a second area wider than the first area. In addition, even when the second effect is executed, a process for displaying the first effect image is executed, and the second effect image is displayed on the near side.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine), and a rendering image (for example, FIG. 28) , An effect executing means for executing an effect using various effect images shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 48, and the like (for example, a group announcement effect operation control process in step S545, and a chance zone effect operation control process in step S543). And the like, and character information display means for displaying character information related to the variable display, wherein the effect execution means is provided in the first area (the area of the image size “small” as shown in FIG. 27A). A first effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) using one effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) and a second region (as shown in FIG. 27A) having a larger image size than the first region. Territory of "large" ), A second effect (for example, a group notice effect etc.) using a second effect image (for example, a group notice effect image or the like) having a higher display priority than the first effect image can be executed. Even when the second effect is executed, the processing for displaying the first effect image is executed, and the character information display means displays the character information even when the second effect image is displayed. Display the contents so that they can be identified.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably display diversified effect images.

(2) In addition, the gaming machine described in (1) above provides a notification unit (for example, an error notification in step S75) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 and the like). Processing, etc.), and the notifying means can notify an error using an error notifying image (for example, the error notifying image shown in FIG. 28), and the error notifying image is compared with the effect image to display the image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image with the Z value “0” is displayed on the front side than the accessory effect effect image with the Z value “4”, for example). ).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably display the effect image.

(3) Further, the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2) is a notifying means (for example, various kinds of notifying images shown in FIG. 28 and the like) for executing the notifying using the notifying image (for example, various notifying images shown in FIG. The notification means is provided when a specific effect (for example, step 5 (SU5) of a step-up notice effect, a group notice effect, a character effect, etc.) is executed. The execution of the specific effect can be notified using an information image (for example, an effect execution notification image or the like), and the information images are set with a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30). , Z values “1” to “3” are set in the effect execution notification image).

  According to the above configuration, the visibility of the information image can be improved.

(4) Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the effect execution means displays the image in conjunction with the operation of the first movable body (for example, the movable body A). The first linked effect using the first linked image (for example, the character effect effect image a) and the second linked image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the second movable body (for example, the movable body B) (For example, the second linked effect using the character effect effect image b) may be executed, and the first linked image may be set to a different priority from the second linked image ( For example, different Z values may be set for the role effect effect image a and the role effect effect image b).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably display the effect image.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4), the first linked image may have the same priority as the second linked image (for example, as described above, The same Z value may be set for the role effect effect image a and the role effect effect image b).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably display the effect image.

(6) Also, the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above is a variable display unit (for example, in a variable display start setting process) for variably displaying identification information (for example, a decorative pattern or the like). A process of setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern as a use pattern (step S532), a process of variably displaying a decorative symbol based on the effect control pattern set in the variable display effect process (step S542), and the like. The effect executing means includes a predetermined effect as an effect for notifying that the variable prize device (for example, the normal variable prize ball device 6B or the like) is controlled in a state in which the game medium is easy to win (for example, a high base state or the like). A predetermined effect using an image (for example, the predetermined effect image of FIG. 48B) (for example, a predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect processing shown in FIG. 46) ) Can be executed, and in the predetermined effect image, the priority of the image display is set higher than the identification information at least in the predetermined period during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer higher than the decorative design), and the priority of the image display is set to be lower than the identification information at least in the predetermined period during the stop display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the predetermined effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the decorative symbol while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably display the effect image.

(7) The gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, and the like). A notification unit (for example, a prize ball number notification operation control process in step S573, a cumulative prize ball number notification operation control process in step S574, or the like) for performing notification is provided, and the notification unit includes a first value notification image (for example, The value (for example, the number of prize balls for the big hit) acquired in a specific period (the big hit game state or the like) using the prize ball number notification image, and the second value notification image (for example, the cumulative prize balls) Using a number of notification images, etc., the magnitude of the value (for example, the cumulative winning prize ball of the jackpot in the consecutive chan) in a special period (for example, a jackpot game state in which the game is continuously changed without entering the normal state). Number, etc.) The value notification image and the second value notification image may have different priorities (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D, the prize ball number notification image includes the cumulative prize ball number notification). A different Z value from the image is set).

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

(8) Further, the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7) uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, and the like). Informing means (for example, error notification processing in step S75, prize ball number notification operation control processing in step S573, cumulative prize ball number notification operation control processing in step S574, etc.) for executing notification, and the notification means includes: An error using an error notification image (eg, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28, etc.) and a value acquired using a value notification image (eg, a prize ball number notification image, a cumulative prize ball number notification image, etc.) , The number of prize balls, etc.), and different priorities may be set for the error notification image and the value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D). The error notification image contains the number of prize balls It sets different Z values from the image and the cumulative prize cell count notification image).

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8) uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, and the like). An informing means for executing the informing (for example, an error informing process in step S75, a certainty change informing operation control process in step S575, and the like) is provided, and the informing unit provides an error informing image (for example, the error informing image shown in FIG. 28). 53), a state notification image (for example, a probable change confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 53, an image notifying that the base is high, an image notifying that a specific fluctuation pattern table is referred to, and the like) ) Can be used to notify a state (for example, the fact that the state is controlled to be in a positive change state after the end of the big hit game state, the state that the state is controlled to a high base state or the like after the end of the big hit game state), and an error notification image And state A priority different from that of the notification image may be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), a Z value different from that of the probability change confirmation notification image is set in the error notification image. There).

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command, etc. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for games counted by the side of the main board. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a fluctuation category and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a display result decision table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a big hit type decision table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control data holding area. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sensor error notification process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination processing in the special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a look-ahead judgment table, etc. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a fluctuation category decision table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a fluctuation pattern decision table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error notification process. It is a figure showing an example of Z value etc. of various images. It is a figure showing an example of various images. It is a figure showing an example of various images. FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram schematically illustrating layers of various images. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in a display area of the image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a prize. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect determination process such as holding. It is explanatory drawing explaining an effect pattern etc., such as a hold. It is an explanatory view for explaining a chance zone effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio etc. of the execution of a main announcement effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the chance zone effect | action operation control processing etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of group notice production operation control processing etc. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect execution notification operation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a waiting process per special figure. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in a display area of the image display device. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in a display area of the image display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the predetermined effect process which performs the predetermined effect related to opening of a normal variable winning prize ball device. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of execution of a predetermined effect, etc. It is an explanatory view for explaining a predetermined effect operation control process and the like. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a Z value and the like of another image. It is a conceptual diagram or the like schematically showing layers of various images. It is a conceptual diagram or the like schematically showing layers of various images. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a Z value and the like of another image. It is a conceptual diagram or the like schematically showing layers of various images.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 has a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in a lower portion of the game area of the gaming board 2. The normal winning prize ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a normal open state, which is a vertical position, and an enlarged open state, which is a tilt position, by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning port. When the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning prize ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( Into an enlarged open state, which is easy to enter.

  Note that, even when the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is in the normally open state, although the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening, it is more likely that the gaming ball enters than in the enlarged opening state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B may be configured such that, in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning port, the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, game balls that have passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening) and a large winning opening (described later) are provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, and count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the "winning", winning in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is referred to as "start winning", and in particular, winning in the first starting winning opening is referred to as first starting winning. The winning in the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (the detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved storage number (described later) ) Is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), a first special figure game (described later) executed on the first special symbol display device 4A or a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 5 (described later). A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display is established.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved storage number is set. If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the second special figure game (described later) executed on the second special symbol display device 4B or the image display device 5 (described later) is executed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first starting prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same or different. Good.

  The first special figure reserved storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning is generated but are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special figure game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is established by the occurrence of the first start winning, the first start winning is generated. If the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, that the variable display game is being executed based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was previously satisfied, When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). In other words, the first special figure reserved storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first startup prize in the execution waiting state. The first special figure reserved storage number decreases by one each time one first start condition is satisfied.

  Note that the first start condition based on a certain first start winning is satisfied, but the first start condition allowing the start of the variable display game based on the first start winning is not satisfied. The variable display corresponding to the first start winning The information relating to the first start winning is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until a first start condition allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first special figure reservation information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning is generated but are temporarily suspended. Due to the occurrence of the second start winning, even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, the second start winning is generated. If the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, that the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that has been previously satisfied is being executed, When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the second special figure reserved storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning in the state of waiting for execution. The second special figure reserved storage number decreases by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  Note that the second start condition based on a certain second start winning is satisfied, but the second start condition allowing the start of the variable display game based on the second start winning is not satisfied. The variable display corresponding to the second start winning The information relating to the second start winning is stored (reserved) as suspension data (second special figure suspension information) until a second start condition allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested second special figure reservation information is executed.

  The number of reserved storages obtained by adding the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number is referred to as “total reserved storage number”. When the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “special figure reserved storage number” or “reserved storage number”. In other words, when simply referred to as “number of special figure reserved storages” or “number of reserved storages”, one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number Or, it may mean three. When the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. When the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are also simply referred to as “special figure reservation information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area of the gaming board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning prize ball device 7 forms a large winning opening that changes between a closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which game balls can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes, for example, a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a special winning opening door solenoid 82 shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state).

  As an example, the special variable winning ball device 7 closes the special winning opening door when the solenoid 82 is off and closes the special winning opening, and opens the special winning opening door when the solenoid 82 is on. Open the special winning opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) the open special winning opening that has been opened is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the special winning opening, a winning in the special winning opening occurs.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of prize balls (for example, 12) paid out based on the occurrence of a winning in the special winning opening is the number of prize balls (for example, 3) paid out based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning. Is larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, three). That is, the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) greatly affects whether or not it is advantageous for the player. That is, when the special winning opening is in the open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the special winning opening is in the closed state. Therefore, when the special winning opening is in the open state, when the special winning opening is in the closed state. Is very advantageous for the player.

  In addition, in addition to or instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variable display) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special figure) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "special symbol 1," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. (Toku-zu) is also referred to as “second toku-zu” or “Toku-zu 2”. In addition, a game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as the first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. When the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) includes a plurality of types of special figure games including numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol has a symbol number corresponding to each symbol. As an example, each number indicating "0" to "9" is assigned a symbol number of "0" to "9", and a symbol indicating "-" is assigned a symbol number of "10". I just need. In addition, the special symbol is not limited to a symbol including a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a symbol indicating “−”, or the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as the letters L and E in the alphabet) in which the combinations of the ones to be turned on and the ones to be turned off in the 7-segment LED are set in advance and set as special symbols It may be displayed.

  A first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided on the right side of the game area on the gaming board 2 (above the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B). . The first reservation display 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure reservation storage number (the number of reservations of the first special figure game) based on the reservation data (first special figure reservation information). A first hold display is displayed to indicate that it is possible. For example, the first reservation display 25A displays the first special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the hold number of the first special figure game is increased by one due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the lighting number is increased by one, and the hold of the first special figure game is held by the establishment of the new first start condition. When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one. As described above, the expression “first hold display” refers to an operation based on the first special drawing hold information (lighting control of the LED of the first hold indicator 25A, first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later)). Display control), and also the display itself based on the first special map reservation information (display by the LED of the first reservation display 25A or display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later)). There is also. For example, the first hold display when a first hold display is newly added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later) indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to “second hold display” and “active display” (described later).

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display is performed to indicate that it is possible. For example, the second reservation indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure reservation storages so as to be specified by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the hold number of the second special figure game is increased by one due to establishment of the new second start condition, the lighting number is increased by one, and the hold of the second special figure game is held by establishment of the new second start condition. When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

  When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”.

  On the left side of the game area of the game board 2, a pass gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general symbol hold display device 25C are provided. A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of stored ordinary figures (described later) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the ordinary symbol display 20 is displayed. The general figure starting condition for executing the general figure game (described later) executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment or dot matrix LED as in the case of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The ordinary symbol display device 20 variably displays (variably displays) ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”) which are a plurality of types of identification information different from special symbols. Note that the variable display game for variably displaying the ordinary symbols is also referred to as the ordinary figure game (or “ordinary figure game”). It should be noted that information relating to the general-purpose game in which the general-purpose start condition is satisfied but the general-purpose start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (reserved) as suspension data (general-purpose suspension information).

  The general-purpose reservation display device 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general-purpose reservation storages based on the reservation data (general-purpose reservation information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The number of stored general-purpose games is the number of general-purpose games whose execution has been temporarily suspended without being immediately executed when a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general-purpose start condition for executing the general-purpose game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general-purpose start condition allowing the start of the general-purpose game is not satisfied ( For example, when the previously established general-purpose game is being executed, the execution of the general-purpose game is suspended (the general-purpose game is in a state of waiting for execution). In other words, the number of stored general-purpose games is the number of games in the general-purpose game waiting to be executed. The number of stored general-purpose drawings decreases by one each time one general-purpose start condition is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, each of which is a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure) executed by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A, or a second special figure game executed by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. In response to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of the special figure game (the first special figure game or the second special figure game), that is, in response to the start of the change of the special figure (the first special figure or the second special figure), the decoration symbol display is performed. In each of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative design (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative design (variable display design, final Stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special figure game (or the second special figure game). , The final decorative symbol (also referred to as a final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. The decorative design corresponding to the decorative design display area 5L is also referred to as a left design, the decorative design corresponding to the decorative design display area 5C is also referred to as a middle design, and the decorative design corresponding to the decorative design display area 5R is also referred to as a right design.

  The decorative pattern is composed of, for example, eight kinds of patterns (alphanumeric characters, Chinese numerals, English characters, figures, character images related to a predetermined motif, and the like). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, it is only necessary that each of the decorative symbols of the alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" is assigned with each of the symbol numbers "1" to "8". The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, but may be any number (for example, seven or nine).

  It should be noted that a fixed display, which is a variable display result of a special symbol (also referred to as a special symbol display result), is stopped and the variable display is terminated, or a fixed decoration symbol (a final stop), which is a variable display result of a decorative symbol. Stop display for stopping the variable display by stopping the display of the symbol, or stopping display of the fixed normal symbol which is a variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as a general symbol display result) and terminating the variable display. , Complete stop display, final stop display, or derived display (or simply "derived"). Note that the change start timing and the change end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily need to coincide with the change start timing and the change end timing of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol is changed within the change time of the special symbol (special symbol change time). It is only necessary that the fluctuation time of the time be within.

  In other words, the change start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the change start timing of the special symbol, or the change end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the fixed special symbol) may be changed to the change end timing of the decorative symbol (the fixed decorative symbol (Stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, a temporary stop display for temporarily displaying a decorative symbol may be performed between the time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the time when the determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined effect (for example, a sliding effect (described later), a pseudo continuous effect (described later), a re-lottery effect (described later), or the like) is performed, a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol may be performed as a part of the predetermined effect, or the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol may be performed along with the execution of the predetermined effect. That is, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol may be regarded as part of the predetermined effect, or may be regarded as being different from the predetermined effect. In the temporary stop display, for example, a decorative pattern whose fluctuation speed is “0” is displayed while being stopped while causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second). It includes a display that stops and displays without causing time, minute shaking, expansion and contraction, and the like.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start prize storage display area 5HL, similar to the first hold display 25A, a first hold display for specifying the first special figure hold storage number is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games whose execution is currently suspended is displayed so as to be specified. In the first start prize storage display area 5HL, as in the case of the second reservation display 25B, a second reservation display for specifying the second special figure reservation storage number is performed. That is, the number of the second special figure games whose execution is currently suspended is displayed so as to be specified.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. That is, when the number of suspensions of the first special figure game is increased due to the establishment of the new first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display in the first startup winning storage display area 5HL, the first startup winning storage display. On the right side of the area 5HL (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information, and a first start winning storage display area 5HL. If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (if there are a plurality of other first hold displays, the left side of the leftmost first hold display). A display may be added. Further, in the case where there are a plurality of first holding displays in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, when the holding number of the first special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the reduced first number is displayed. The first hold display (the first oldest first hold display) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special map hold information is deleted, Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  In the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of reserves of the second special figure game increases due to establishment of the new second start condition, if there is no other second reserve display in the second start winning storage storage display area 5HR, the second start winning storage display. A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (on the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and a second start winning storage display area 5HR. If there is another second hold display, the new second hold display is on the right side of the other second hold display (or the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). A display may be added. Further, when there are a plurality of second holding displays in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, and when the holding number of the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the reduced second number is displayed. The second start display (the second oldest display displayed since the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special map hold information is deleted, Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side).

  When the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start winning storage display area 5H”.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a digest display area, etc.) AHA is arranged. In the active display area, an active display (also referred to as a display during digestion, this time display, etc.) is displayed based on the fact that the hold display is erased from the start winning prize storage display area 5H due to establishment of the start condition. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold display displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA to display the active display, and the second start is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the second hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR moves (shifts) to the active display area AHA, and the active display is displayed. The display mode of the hold display immediately before moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA may be different from the display mode of the active display immediately after moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA. That is, the display mode may change when shifting to the active display. Hereinafter, an active display that is displayed based on the fact that a certain hold display M is deleted may be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M. That is, "corresponding" in the "active display corresponding to the hold display" means that the active display takes over at least a part of the hold display when the variable display of a decorative symbol or the like is started by the disappearance of the hold display. , Or displayed in a manner similar to the hold display (for example, when the same character is drawn).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the active display area AHA is disposed between the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR as shown in FIG. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on detection of a game ball that has entered any of the general prize holes by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port through which a game ball that has not entered any winning port is taken in.

  At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of a game ball in accordance with the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by a player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping driving of a firing motor provided in the hit ball firing device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (retains) excess balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be able to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the near side on the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the center portion of the lower plate). I have. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator's hand is hooked when the player grips the operation rod). I have. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger or the like) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, a left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised as follows. It is sufficient that a trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button or the like is built in the operation stick.

  It is sufficient that a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilt operation on the operation rod is provided in a lower portion of the stick controller 31A inside the main body of the lower plate. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmission-type photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation stick when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and two transmission-type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) that are arranged on the right side of the center position of the operation stick as viewed from the player side and perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2. What is necessary is just to be comprised including a photosensor.

  The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B at a predetermined position on the near side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A) or the like, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. Is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player. It is sufficient that a push sensor that detects a player's operation performed on the push button 31B is provided inside the body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  A sound output member is provided around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a speaker 8UL and a speaker 8UR are installed at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a speaker 8LL and a speaker 8LR are installed at a lower right and left lower part of the upper plate (left and right upper part of the lower plate). Has been installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are simply referred to as the speakers 8 unless particularly distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) sound (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs an effect sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, a BGM, a song, or the like output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice (line, message) output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning in the first starting winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice output in response to an operation of operating the push button 31B. Since the act of operating the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the act of operating the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is issued to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound or a voice that is provided to notify that the state is shifted to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is changed. A sound or a voice that gives advance notice or suggestion that the game mode is to be shifted to the big hit gaming state before shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  Examples of the warning sound include a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (reserved) in the lower dish, a warning sound output when a glass door (not shown) is opened, and the like. .

  Inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3, movable parts (movable bodies) that operate as effects or decorations are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first position (the initial position shown in FIG. 1) is shifted from the first position (the initial position shown in FIG. 1) to the second position (the lower end position, for example, the front position of the display area of the image display device 5). There is provided a movable role 17 that can move up to the position.

  A light-emitting member (light-emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable accessory 17, the light emitting members 9CL and 9CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed on the upper part of the gaming machine frame 3. 9U, a light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless otherwise specified. The lamp 9 may be configured by, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be configured by a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating light (for example, a police lamp) having a rotating part. In addition to the above, for example, various light-emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) in the game area.

  The above-described image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and movable accessory 17 are effect devices for executing effects, but the gaming machine 1 is, for example, another effect such as a device having a vibrating portion, a device having a blower portion, or the like. A device may be provided.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the general-purpose hold display 25C may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ordinary symbol game is started by the ordinary symbol display 20 based on the establishment of the universal symbol start condition after the universal symbol start condition is satisfied. In the ordinary figure game, after starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol (after starting the variation of the ordinary symbol), after a lapse of a predetermined time, which is the variation time of the ordinary symbol, a fixed ordinary symbol that results in the variable display of the ordinary symbol Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a fixed symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the numeral indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed symbol, the variable display result of the symbol is “Loss”. Become. In response to the result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol being “per-figure”, an enlarged opening control (tilt control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is at the tilt position is performed. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the first start condition being satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, a special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, and the second special figure game is started. After the start condition is satisfied, the second special condition display device 4B starts the special figure game (second special figure game) based on the establishment of the second start condition. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time elapses, the variable special display result of the special symbol is obtained. Derivation and display of symbols (special figure display results). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, " Lost ". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the predetermined display result may be "small hit".

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating a number of “3”, “5”, or “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol of “−” is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special figure games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state in the big hit gaming state. The jackpot game state in which the big winning opening is controlled to be open is an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a small hitting gaming state which is a special gaming state different from the big hitting gaming state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines a round (also referred to as a “round game”) that is advantageous to the player in the big hit game state after the variable display result in the special map game has become “big hit”. (The predetermined number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the special winning opening. In each round (each round), the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 to change the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens the special winning opening door at the start of the round, changes the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state, maintains the special winning opening in the open state, and thereafter closes the special winning opening door. Then, the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state to end one round.

  In addition, at the start of the round, the special winning opening door is not immediately opened and the special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, but at the start of the round, the special winning opening is closed without opening the special winning opening door immediately. After maintaining, the special winning opening door may be opened to change the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state. In addition, instead of closing the special winning opening door from the open state to the closed state by closing the special winning opening door at the end of the round, closing the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state by closing the winning opening door. , And then the round may be ended.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the special winning opening to an open state once per round (changes the special winning opening from an open state to a closed state during one round). Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the special winning opening to the open state a plurality of times in one round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the special winning opening to an open state twice per round (in a single round, the special winning opening is opened → closed → opened → closed). State may be changed).

  In the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 repeatedly executes the round until the number of executions of the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the round even if the number of rounds has not been reached to the predetermined upper limit, because a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a gaming ball has not won the big winning opening). May be terminated.

  Note that the predetermined upper limit number may be one type (for example, always ten times) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit number may be any number selected (lottery) from a plurality of types (for example, 2, 8, 16 times).

  In the round, the special winning opening determines whether a predetermined upper limit opening time elapses after opening the special winning opening door, or whether a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings occurs in the special winning opening. It is kept open until it is established. Note that the predetermined upper limit opening time may be one type (for example, always 29 seconds) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit opening time may be any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of time (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds).

  In the round, the special winning opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state and the round starts, the special winning opening is set until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses after the closing of the special winning opening door. It is kept closed for a period. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round is started with the special winning opening kept in a closed state, the special winning opening is kept in a closed state until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the start of the round. Will be maintained. The predetermined time (closed period) may be one type (for example, always 3 seconds) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined time (closed period) may be any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of time (for example, 1 second and 3 seconds).

  From the above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes eight rounds of changing the big winning opening from, for example, the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) in the big hit gaming state, or opens the big winning opening. Each round that changes from the state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, and the special winning opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that changes from (seconds) to closed state (1 second) can be executed twice. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the big hit game state, after executing each round in which the special winning opening is changed from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times, the special winning opening is opened (0. Each round of changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) can be executed eight times.

  Note that among the rounds in the jackpot game state, a round having a relatively long upper limit opening time (for example, a round in which the opening state is 29 seconds) is also called a normal opening round, and a round having a relatively short upper limit opening time (for example, opening A round in which the state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term opening round.

  In addition, among the special symbols that are the jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled in the jackpot game state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as a normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are the jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot game state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as a short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit game state (normally open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (the predetermined number of rounds). In the big hit gaming state (short-term opening big hit state) controlled after the short-term opening round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term opening round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). You. In addition, if the number of executions of the normal open round is larger in the normal open big hit state than in the short open big hit state, the short open round is executed in addition to the normal open round in the normal open big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the jackpot gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special map game becomes “big hit” as a value obtained by the player in each of the jackpot gaming states, It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot game states in which the degree of advantage (for example, the number of prize balls (number of balls)) seen from the player differs.

  As an example of a case where the short-term opening round is not used, a jackpot game state in which the round (normal opening round) is executed eight times and a round which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state in which the round (normal opening round) is executed eight times, A jackpot game state in which (normal opening round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each round (normal open round) and the time of each open state (open time), the round (normal open round) is performed. In the big hit game state where the game is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a doubled number of balls in the big hit game state where the round (normal opening round) is executed 8 times.

  As an example of the case where the short-term opening round is used, a jackpot game state in which the normal opening round is executed eight times and then the short-term opening round is executed eight times (substantially eight rounds of the jackpot gaming state), and a bigger jackpot gaming state of substantially eight rounds It is possible to prepare a jackpot game state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous for the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each of the normal open rounds, and there is no difference in the time of each open state (open time), and the number of payout balls obtained in the short open round Is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit game state where the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double payout in the big hit game state of substantially 8 rounds.

  In addition, even if the upper limit opening time has not elapsed after opening the special winning opening door, if a predetermined number of winnings occur in the special winning opening, the special winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state. By providing a difference in the predetermined number, the value obtained by the player may be made different. For example, a jackpot game state in which a normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) in which the predetermined number is 5 is executed eight times, and a normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) in which the predetermined number is 5 is performed in eight. A jackpot game state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) in which the predetermined number is set to 10 is executed eight times, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state in which the jackpot is executed twice, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit game state in which the normal opening round with six prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit game state in which the normal opening round with six prize balls is executed 16 times, A jackpot game state in which a normal opening round with 12 prize balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player according to the jackpot gaming state itself (the value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state, By varying the length of the period (for example, the number of times of saving time, the number of STs) in which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state is changed, the value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state is obtained. May be different.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after an 8R certain-variable big hit (described later) is set as a big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A jackpot game state in which a normal opening round is executed eight times and a jackpot game state in which a normal opening round controlled 16 times after a 16R certain-variable big hit (described later) is executed are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, a first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of one of the special figure games, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to a specific variable during a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol. There may be a case where a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination is reached.

  The reach state is a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the big hit combination (also referred to as a “reach variation symbol”). Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuing, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as establishing the reach (reach established).

  In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative symbol, or changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol, a rendering operation different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as the change of the display mode of the character image and the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the change mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect (or a reach effect display). Note that, in the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation of the lamp 9 (extinguishing, blinking, lighting, etc.), and the operation of the movable accessory 17 (still, (Fine movement, movement, etc.) may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before the reach state.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be made different. This makes it possible to make the big hit expectation different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is to be executed, that is, which of the reach effects to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach having a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  In addition, the big hit expectation degree by a certain effect is, for example, (the probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (the probability of becoming a big hit) / ｛(the probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (the probability of the big hit) + (Probability that the effect is executed except at the time of big hit) × (probability of not getting big hit)｝. In addition, when a certain effect is always executed and the “big hit” is achieved, the big hit expectation degree of the effect is “1”. The same is true for the degree of super reach expected from a certain production.

  Also, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one mode of the variable display effect, a sliding effect or a pseudo continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative symbol or the like can be executed. The slide effect is an effect in which, in one special figure game, the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and then the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is re-variably displayed. Alternatively, an effect is provided in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a part of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is re-variably displayed. According to the slide effect, the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed can be changed to another symbol, so that, for example, the non-reach state can be made to look like the reach state.

  Pseudo continuous production means that in one special figure game, the decoration symbol temporarily and temporarily stopped in a part or all of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is displayed, and then the decoration symbol that has been temporarily stopped is re-variably displayed. It is a production to make. The re-variable display in the pseudo continuous production can be performed a plurality of times (for example, up to four times) for one special figure game.

  The number of times of re-variable display (the number of times of re-variable display) in the pseudo continuous production is the number of times of variable display (first time variable display) until all the decorative symbols temporarily stop temporarily in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Once), the number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped last (one time), and the number of times of re-variable display X between the first variable display and the last variable display X ( (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the total number of times (X + 2). The number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (number of temporary stops). In addition, the number of times of re-variable display in the pseudo consecutive production is also referred to as the pseudo consecutive number (or the pseudo consecutive change number). In other words, the number of pseudo-runs, the number of re-variable displays and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo runs such as the first time, the second time, the third time,... Is also referred to as “continuation of the pseudo run”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the re-variable display (re-fluctuation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration symbol can be changed based on the first start condition or the second start condition being satisfied once. It is possible to make the display appear as if it were started two to five times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example in which the re-variable display (re-fluctuation) is performed once or twice is shown (see FIG. 5), but the re-variable display (re-fluctuation) may be performed three or more times.

  The pseudo continuous production may be performed before the reach is established, or may be performed after the reach is established. That is, in the pseudo continuous production, the temporary stop display may be performed before the reach state is reached, or the temporary stop display may be performed after the reach state is reached.

  The slip production (similar to the pseudo continuous production) is a warning or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach production or a certain reach production may be executed, or that the big hit expectation is high. Is also good. Hereinafter, an effect that indicates to a player that there is a possibility that any of the reach effects or a certain reach effect is executed, or that the jackpot expectation degree is high, and the like, may be collectively referred to as an advance effect.

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slide effect and the pseudo continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, a change start timing (for example, when the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol start to change at the same time, the timing to start the variation at the same time, or when the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol do not start to change at the same time For example, the effect of changing the timing at which the pattern that starts to change first starts changing from the normal time, and the effect of changing the order of starting the change of the left, middle, and right symbols from the normal time are announced. May be executed. Further, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as a notice effect. For example, an effect of making the background image different from the normal time or an effect of making the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. The announcement effect may be based on an operation other than the display operation. For example, the announcement effect may be based on audio output from the speaker 8, light emission of the lamp 9, operation of the movable accessory 17, or the like.

  It should be noted that the notification (notification, suggestion) based on the notification effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notification content is realized. For example, the announcement effect for notifying the possibility of the reach state may be performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the announcement effect that informs the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” may be any as long as it is performed before the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  What is necessary is to include what will become a look-ahead notice effect (also called "advance judgment notice effect") in the notice effects. Prior to the start of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice, the look-ahead preview effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a "big hit" based on the hold information of the special figure game and the like. (Pre-reading), a preview effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information to be subjected to the prefetch notice effect is referred to as target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold information. Also referred to as variable display of the target. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the hold information of the target is consumed (during the process of digesting the hold information of the target including the variable display of the target) and when the information of the target before the hold information is displayed. The execution may be performed while the pending information is being digested, or while the target pending information is being digested, and while the pending information before the target pending information is being digested.

  Note that, as the prefetch notice effect, a hold effect according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR may be prepared. The hold effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs and a second hold display added to the second start winning storage display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. (In the case of an additional production), or the already-displayed first or second suspension display changes to the preliminary presentation mode (including a change from one preliminary presentation mode to another preliminary presentation mode. And the same), an effect to be executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and a character or the like is directly displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 in the hold display. The effect is to be performed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. Note that when the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) that is the action target changes, but when the hold action gassing effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  In addition, an active display effect according to a display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared as the notice effect. In the active display effect, an effect in which an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or an active display already displayed changes to the notice mode (from another notice mode to another notice mode). An effect (active display change effect) that includes a change to the notice mode, and an effect that is executed when the active display changes to the notice mode, in which a character or the like is activated in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect that directly or indirectly acts on the display (active display effect effect) or an effect that is executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the active display. Directly or indirectly acting effects (active display effect gassing effects) etc. are included Good. Note that when the active display effect effect is executed, the display mode of the active display that is the action target changes, but when the active display effect gassing effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning) or may be determined at the time of the change. In addition, the holding effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as an effect such as holding.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach-loss combination may be stopped and displayed after a reach effect is executed. Such a variable display result of the decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) that will be the big hit symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number of “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is displayed. When the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probable big hit”, which is one mode of “big hit”, is displayed. The round controlled when the 8R probability variable hit or 16R probability variable hit is a normal open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number of “3”, “5”, or “7” is a normal open round big hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed as described above, an 8R probability change hit occurs. However, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. In this case, a “2R probability change jackpot (also referred to as“ probability ”)” in which the short-term opening round is executed may be adopted. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number of “5” is a short-term open round big hit symbol (also referred to as a stochastic symbol). In the “big hit”, the distinction between “8R certain variable big hit”, “16R certain variable big hit”, and “2R certain variable big hit” is referred to as “big hit type”.

  In the case of the 16R probability change big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number of “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and the predetermined reach effect is performed. After the execution, etc., the finalized decorative symbol which is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot is that the symbol number is odd and the same decorative symbol is formed on a predetermined effective line (for example, a horizontal line) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are aligned (ie, "1", "1", "1", "3", "3", "3", "5", "5", " 5 "," 7 "," 7 "," 7 ").

  In the case of the 8R probability change big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number of "3" or "5" is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached and the predetermined symbol is reached. After the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol which is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability change jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability-change jackpot is one in which three identical decorative symbols having even-numbered symbol numbers are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ( That is, "2", "2", "2", "4", "4", "4", "6", "6", "6", "8", "8", and "8").

  In the present embodiment, the 2R-probable jackpot is not provided. However, when the 2R-probable jackpot is provided when the 2R-probable jackpot is provided, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and the reach is established. After the effect is executed or the like, or without reaching the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol which is the jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability-change jackpot is that, on a predetermined active line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the symbol numbers are odd and different decorative symbols (at least one of three (3) "3", "5", "7", "5", "5", "7", "3", "5", "7" ") Or a combination including a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, a combination of" 1 "," probable ", and" 2 ").

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R certain jackpot is stopped and displayed. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to a big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability change big hit has occurred, the normal release round is executed 16 times (rounds) to be controlled to a normal open big hit state, and after that, the time reduction control (time reduction control) and the probability change control (probability variation control) are performed. ) Is performed. In addition, based on the fact that the 8R probability change big hit has occurred, the normal release round is controlled to be executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the time change control and the probability change control are performed.

  By performing the probable change control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than when the probable change control is not performed. Probable change control is performed when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (also referred to as the number of times of probable change) after the end of the big hit game state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. Is terminated when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become "big hit" when the probable change control is being performed, the probable change control is not performed if the special figure game of the predetermined ST times (probable change times) is consumed. finish. The predetermined ST count is, for example, 70 times.

  Further, by performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened compared to when the time reduction control is not performed. The time-saving control is performed when a special time-saving game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit game state, and when the variable display result becomes “big hit”, any one of the conditions is satisfied first. To end. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become "big hit" when the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been completed. Note that the predetermined number of times saved is, for example, 70 times.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 20 controls the normal symbol variation time (normal symbol variation time) in the general symbol game to be shorter than when the time reduction control is not performed. The control for improving the probability that the variable display result of the symbol is "per-figure" is improved than when the time-saving control is not performed. In the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per-figure", The game ball is in the second starting prize, such as a control in which the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable wing piece is set to be longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and a control in which the number of tilts is increased as compared to when the time reduction control is not performed. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easy to pass (enter) the mouth and increase the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. As described above, the control which is advantageous to the player by making it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening with the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged opening state is increased as compared to when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the second special figure game can be frequently executed, so that the next variable display result is obtained. Is reduced to a "big hit". The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which time saving control is performed.

  A game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. The game state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The time-saving state (high base state) and the high-accuracy state (probable change state) are examples of advantageous states that are advantageous to the player.

  The game state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probable change control, that is, the game state which is both the highly accurate state (probable change state) and the high base state (reduced time state), is a highly accurate high base state or a time-saving accurate change state. Also called. A game state in which only the probable change control is performed and the time saving control and the high opening control are not performed, that is, a game state in which the game is in the high-accuracy state (probable change state) but not in the high-base state (time-saving state) is in the high-accuracy low-base state. Alternatively, it is also referred to as a time-saving indeterminate state. Note that only the high-accuracy high-base state (saving time-varying state) may be referred to as the “probable-variable state”. A game state in which time-saving control or high-open control is performed without performing the probability change control, that is, a game state in which the game is not in the high-precision state (probable-change state) but is in the high-base state (time-saving state) is also referred to as a low-probability-high-base state. Is done. A gaming state in which the time-saving control and the high-opening control are not performed without performing the probable change control, that is, the gaming state in which neither the high-precision state (probable-variation state) nor the high-base state (time-saving state) is referred to as a low-probability low-base state. Is done. The low-accuracy low-base state is a normal state in which neither the variable control, the time-saving control, nor the high-open control is performed, and is distinguished from the high-accuracy high-base state, the high-accuracy low-base state, and the low-accuracy high-base state. It may be referred to as “normal state”. It should be noted that a gaming state that is not the big hit gaming state may be referred to as a “normal state” to be distinguished from the big hit gaming state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a state after an initialization process is executed after the power is turned on such as when a system reset is performed) is a normal state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the state is controlled to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R certain big hit or 16R certain big hit has been achieved, and after the completion, the predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), the high accurate high base State controlled.

  In the present embodiment, although the number of time savings and the number of STs (the number of times of probability change) after a big hit (8R probability variable hit, 16R probability variable hit) are the same (both 70 times), the big hit (8R probability variable big hit, 16R The number of time savings after the probability change hit and the number of STs (the probability change number) may be made different. In the present embodiment, the number of STs (probable number of changes) after the 8R probability change hit and the number of STs (probable number of changes) after the 16R probability change hit are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after a big hit (probable change count) may be different from the number of STs after a 16R certainty big hit (probable change count). Also, in the present embodiment, the number of times saved after the 8R probable big hit and the number of times saved after the 16R probable big hit are the same (both 70 times), but the number of times saved after the 8R probable big hit And the number of working hours after the 16R probability change big hit may be made different.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R probability variable hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variable hit is provided, the short-time open round is executed twice (round) based on the 2R probability variable hit. The state may be controlled, and after that, the time-variable control and the time-variable control may be performed in the same manner as when the 16R probability-change big hit or the 8R probability-change big hit occurs.

  In the present embodiment, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability change control is being performed, if the special figure game of the predetermined ST times (the probability change number) is consumed, Although the probable change control ends, the probable change control may not be finished until the variable display result becomes "big hit" without providing the number of STs (probable change number). That is, a probable change big hit that continues the probable change control until the next big hit may be provided. When providing a probable change jackpot in which the probable change control is continued until the next big hit is achieved, a normal big hit in which the probable change control is not performed after the end may be further provided. For example, the normal opening round is controlled to a normal opening big hit state in which the normal opening round is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability change control is not performed (the time saving control or the high opening control may or may not be performed). ), An 8R normal jackpot may be provided.

  In addition, the probable-change control is ended when the “probable-change-over” is determined to end the high-probability state in the probable-change fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit game state. It may be. In such a mode, the special figure game with the predetermined ST times (the number of probable changes) is not performed until the special figure game with the predetermined ST times (the probable change number) is completed, and the special figure game with the predetermined ST times (the probable change number) is completed. A probable falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time saving control and the high opening control.

  For the decorative design, a re-lottery effect may be executed. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability change jackpot, the decorative symbol is changed again with the same decorative symbol aligned. , A decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot and a decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot may be finally stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol. In the present embodiment, the 2R-probable jackpot is not provided. However, when the 2R-probable jackpot is provided, the same applies to the case where a decorative pattern serving as a jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R-probable jackpot is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  In addition, after the finalized decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability changing jackpot is derived and displayed, a period until the eighth round is completed (or, after the eighth round is completed, the next variable display game is executed) During the period until the start), the promotion of the number of rounds for notifying that the big hit is the 16R certain variable big hit may be executed. In the present embodiment, the 2R-probable jackpot is not provided. However, when the 2R-probable jackpot is provided, the same applies to the case where the finalized decorative symbol corresponding to the 2R-probable jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the normal jackpot is not provided. However, after the final decorative pattern which is the jackpot combination corresponding to the normal jackpot is derived and displayed when the normal jackpot is provided, a period until the final round is completed ( Alternatively, after the end of the last round, until the next variable display game starts, a probable change promotion effect for notifying that the big hit is a probable big hit may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion performed during the round (round number promotion production, probable change promotion production) is called jackpot medium promotion production (big hit middle round number promotion production, jackpot medium probability change promotion production), and after the final round ends The performed promotion effects (round number promotion effects, probable change promotion effects) are sometimes referred to as ending promotion effects (ending round number promotion effects, ending probable change promotion effects).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has mounted thereon various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on a back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the ordinary symbol display 20, etc. It also has a control function.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits the signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and a signal from the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and displays the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the movable 9 and the movable role 17 are mounted.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and for outputting a sound from the speaker 8 based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for performing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling the lamp output, which is provided separately from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit and the like are mounted. The accessory control board 16 is a control board for controlling the operation of the accessory provided separately from the effect control board 12, and drives the movable accessory 17 based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. A circuit for outputting a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called a sensor. Should be fine. Note that the gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11 in the same manner. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, and a switch for detecting illegal electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first reservation display device 25A, a second reservation display device 25B, and a general drawing reservation display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as display control is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or three or more. Good.

  Note that information constituting each effect control command may be stored in a command table in the ROM 101, for example. When a certain effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by a transmission command pointer in a transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store it in the buffer area specified. Thereafter, the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). Transmitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command designating the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command designating the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designating command that designates a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R certain variable big hit”, or “8R certain variable big hit”, and big hit type Different EXT data is set according to the result of the determination.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . The notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening include, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of executions of the round (for example, “1” to “16”) in the state of the normal opening big hit and the short opening big hit. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a first starting winning has been generated, and the first special winning has occurred. This is a first startup opening winning notification command for notifying that the first startup condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A has been established (the first startup opening winning designation command, the first startup opening winning command). Command).

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and the second starting winning is generated. This is a second starting opening winning notification command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B has been established (a second starting opening winning designation command, a second starting opening winning command). Time command).

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the first start winning storage storage display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved figure storage number notifying command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the second start winning storage storage display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, when the first startup prize has occurred (when the number of first special figure reserved storages has increased), the first start storage prize notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command are transmitted as the reserved storage information. Further, when the second start winning is generated (when the number of the second special figure reserved storages is increased), a second reserved storage number notification command is transmitted as the reserved storage information together with the second startup opening winning notification command. In addition, when the first start winning is generated, a second reserved storage number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the first starting opening winning notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second starting winning occurs. In this case, a first reserved storage number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the second start-up opening winning notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command. Further, when the first special figure reserved storage number (or the second special figure reserved storage number) is increased, the first start prize storage display area 5HL (or the second start prize storage display area 5HR) and the like are displayed. A first reserved storage number addition designation command (or a second reserved storage number addition designation command) for designating the addition of the special figure reserved storage number (second special figure reserved storage number) is transmitted, and the first special figure reserved storage number ( Alternatively, when the second special figure reserved storage number decreases, the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (or the second reserved figure) for specifying the subtraction of the first special figure reserved storage number (or the second special figure reserved storage number) (A storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of or in addition to the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved storage number addition designation command (total reserved storage number subtraction designation command) for specifying addition (or subtraction) of the total reserved storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designation commands) indicating the content of the winning-time determination result. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command showing the result of determining whether or not the variable display result is "big hit" as a winning determination result, and the result of determining the big hit type. The command C6XXH is a fluctuation category designation command (also referred to as a fluctuation category command) indicating a result of determining whether or not the fluctuation category is a fluctuation category corresponding to a specific pattern (described later) as a prize-winning determination result. The fluctuation category is also referred to as a fluctuation pattern type, and is a name when the fluctuation patterns of the decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the fluctuation category is a group name of each group including a fluctuation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the random number value determination process at the time of winning (FIG. 16), when a starting winning is generated, except for a part of cases (when there is a first starting winning in a high base state or the like), a variable category determining process is performed. It is determined based on the random number value MR3 of whether or not the fluctuation category is a fluctuation category corresponding to a specific pattern (described later). Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation category command, and control for transmitting to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 displays a variable display based on the starting prize based on the value set in the variable category command transmitted from the main board 11 when the starting prize is generated. Can be recognized.

  The production control commands such as the fluctuation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used by the production control CPU 120 to control one or more rendering devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, movable movable object 17, etc.). Used when Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the display operation in the image display device 5 is also referred to as a display control command, the effect control command used to control the sound output operation by the speaker 8 is also referred to as a sound control command, The effect control command used to control the light emitting operation is also referred to as a lamp control command, and the effect control command used to control the operation of the movable accessory 17 is also referred to as an accessory control command. It should be noted that even if there is a display control command, a voice control command, a lamp control command, and a command related to a plurality of production devices, such as a production control command, there is also a production control command. Good.

  The command D0XX is a special winning opening winning notification command for notifying that a game ball has been awarded to the special winning opening (sometimes referred to as a special winning opening winning designation command). The special winning opening winning notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when the game ball passes through the special winning opening, for example.

  The command E0XX is a magnetic abnormality notification designation command for designating that a magnetic abnormality has occurred. For example, a magnet sensor (not shown, also referred to as a magnetic sensor) is provided on the back of a predetermined area of the game area 2, and a magnetic abnormality notification designation command is issued when the magnet sensor detects an abnormality (the magnet sensor indicating an abnormal value). The signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when a signal is input). It should be noted that the magnet sensor detects an abnormality, for example, when there is an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet. As a method for detecting magnetic anomaly, an abnormal value may be detected with a constant reference value, or an abnormal value may be detected using a magnetic value at power-on as a reference value.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing the program read from the ROM 101. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining a fluctuation category, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is controlled to be countable. Note that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, a variation pattern of the decorative symbol will be described. Hereinafter, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as a “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern (“ non-reach loss variation pattern ”,“ non-reach ”,“ non-reach variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ non-reach ”among the variable display results of“ loss ”. (Also referred to as “losing” variation pattern) ”or“ reach variation pattern (“reach loss variation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is “reach” in the case where the variable display result is “losing”. ) Is included.

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “hit variation pattern”. The hit change pattern includes a "big hit change pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a "small hit change pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". Is also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of change patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  For non-reach fluctuation patterns, prepare multiple fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times, corresponding to the time saving control executed when the total number of pending storages is large or when the gaming state is the high accuracy state or the time saving state. Good to put. Thus, by selecting one of the change patterns according to the total number of held storages and the game state, it becomes possible to perform control to reduce the change time according to the total number of held storages and the game state.

  As a variation pattern including a reach effect such as a jackpot variation pattern or a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to a reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. The fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed is referred to as a “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the change pattern in which the super reach reach effect is executed is referred to as a “super-reach change pattern”.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the fluctuation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” and “PA2-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA4” to “PA4-3” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA5” to “PA5-3” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB1”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The fluctuation category “PA4” and the fluctuation category “PA5” are collectively referred to as “super-reach (loss) fluctuation category”, and the fluctuation category “PB4” and the fluctuation category “PB5” are collectively referred to as “super-reach (big hit)”. ) Fluctuation category ", and the fluctuation category" PA4 ", the fluctuation category" PA5 ", the fluctuation category" PB4 ", and the fluctuation category" PB5 "are collectively referred to as a" super reach fluctuation category ".

  Among the super reach fluctuation categories, the fluctuation category “PA5” and the fluctuation category “PB5” are fluctuation categories with the action of the movable object including the operation of the movable accessory 17, and the fluctuation category “PA4” and the fluctuation category “PB4” , A variable category without the operation of the accessory, which does not include the operation of the movable accessory 17. That is, the movable accessory 17 does not operate in the super reach α, but the movable accessory 17 operates in the super reach β.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time has a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time has a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA4” is a super-reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time has a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super-reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time has a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super-reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super-reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern “PB3-1”.

  Although the fluctuation category “PB1” has been described as a shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category, three symbols (for example, the same symbol) stop at the same time without going through the reach, and a shortening / big hit occurs. It may be a non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” when the fluctuation category “PB1” is the shortened / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category is a shortened / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern. Note that “shortened / non-reach (big hit)” is also called “short hit”, “shortened / non-reach (big hit) change category” is also called “short hit change category”, and “shortened / non-reach (big hit)” change pattern "Is also referred to as" a sudden change pattern ". Further, the fluctuation category “PB1” may include a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern and a shortened / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time has a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In addition, in addition to the above, a fluctuation pattern in which a sliding effect is performed, and a fluctuation in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is performed (for example, a fanning production similar to the pseudo continuous production is performed but not temporarily stopped). A pattern may be prepared.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R probable big hit (probability) is not provided, but when the 2R probable big hit (probability) is provided, a variation category for the 2R probable big hit (probability) may be provided. For example, the fluctuation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, and “PC3” for the 2R-probable jackpot (abrupt) may be provided. The variation category “PC1” includes the variation patterns “PC1-1” and “PC1-2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time has a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, you may prepare the non-reach (probability) fluctuation pattern in which a slide effect is performed.

  The variation patterns “PC2” to “PC2-3” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super-reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. Note that a super-reach α (probability) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) gasse is executed may be prepared.

  The variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-3” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super-reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. Note that a super-reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) gasse is executed may be prepared.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In the ROM 101, data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, Is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 includes a first special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special figure display apparatus 4A and a second special figure game by the second special figure display apparatus 4B. In the game (a special figure game using the second special figure), before the fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed, the variable display result is set as a “big hit (16R probable big hit, 8R probable big hit)” It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control the game state based on a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result.

  In the display result determination table 130, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "big hit (16R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit)". "And" losing "are assigned to the special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined according to whether the state is the low-probability state or the high-probability state. It is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "losing".

  In the display result determination table 130, when the gaming state is in the high-accuracy state, more determination values are assigned to the special hit display result of "big hit" than when the gaming state is in the low-accuracy state. Specifically, in the low-accuracy state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) determination values (values in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special map display result of “big hit”. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, a larger number (specifically, 819) of determination values “8000” to “8818” than the predetermined number are assigned to the special map display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set to "big hit" compared to the non-probable change state (low-probability state). When the game state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases.

  It should be noted that a different display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure uses a predetermined range for the special figure display result of “small hit”. A determination value is assigned, and in the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, the determination value of the predetermined range smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special map display result is to be set to "big hit" to control the jackpot game state. Is a table that is referred to. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the first special figure display device 4A executes the first special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure) or the second special figure display apparatus 4B executes the second special figure game. Depending on whether or not to execute (the special map game using the second special map), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is changed to the respective jackpot type (16R probability change, 8R probability change). Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be fluctuated (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, (50 values) (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to the 16R probability change jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, in the case where the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the determination values (“0” to “0”) which are larger than the predetermined number (specifically, 80) are set. 79 ") is assigned to the 16R probability variable jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability big hit is more likely to occur than in the first special figure game. Therefore, the game state where the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( In the high-accuracy high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to increase the expectation of the 16R certain-change big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R probable big hit (probability) is not provided. However, when the 2R probable big hit (probability) is provided, the second special figure game is different from the first special figure game in the second special figure game. A smaller number of determination values may be assigned to the 2R-probable jackpot (probability). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, it is less likely to be a 2R probability change big hit (shock) than in the first special figure, so that the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the game state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the 2R-probable big hit (probability), in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in amusement of a game due to a prolonged game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation category determination table which is referred to in order to determine any of the plurality of types of the fluctuation category. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variable category determination tables in which the types of the variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the fluctuation category determination table, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is assigned to each of the fluctuation categories. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information of all variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables in which the types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. Instead of a plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a look-ahead determination table that is referred to to determine whether or not the fluctuation category is a specific pattern (described later). Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of prefetch determination tables having different determination contents, different determination ratios, and the like. In the look-ahead determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each of the determination contents. Instead of a plurality of look-ahead determination tables, one large look-ahead determination table including information of all the look-ahead determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). You. In particular, at least the game state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like (for example, FIG. Process flag). In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. I have. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores a special figure game in which a game ball has passed (entered) a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first starting winning has occurred but has not yet started. The data (first special figure reservation information) of the reservation data of the first special figure game (first special figure display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special map reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) in the first starting winning opening with the reservation number and associates the CPU 103 with a random number based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as suspension data (first special figure suspension information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second starting winning has been generated, but the second starting winning has not been started yet. The storage data (second special figure reservation information) of the (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit 151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the holding number in the second starting winning opening and associates the holding number with the CPU 103 based on the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as suspension data (second special figure suspension information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  It should be noted that the first special figure display device 4A holds the first special figure game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special figure display device 4B holds the second special figure game. The holding data (second special figure holding information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in a common holding storage unit in association with the holding number.

  The general figure hold storage unit 151C stores the hold data (normal figure hold) related to the general figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the general figure holding storage unit 151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball, in association with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as hold data (general-purpose hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 displays data indicating a flag value, an on state or an off state for each of a special figure process flag, a high-accuracy flag, a high base flag, a big hit flag, and the like. The data is stored. The high-accuracy flag is a flag indicating whether the state is a high-accuracy state or a low-accuracy state. The high base flag is a flag indicating whether the state is the high base state or the low base state. The big hit flag is a flag indicating that the big hit game state.

  The game control timer setting section 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores a first reserved storage count value, which is a storage value of a first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number, and a second special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting, the total reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number, and the like. It is memorized. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a value stored in a variation counter (described later) (variation count value).

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that performs processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. A circuit 124, an I / O 125, and an RTC (real-time clock) circuit 126 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable character, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control program read from the ROM 121. 17) is performed for controlling the effect operation. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads fixed data from the ROM 121, a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122, and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the variable data in the RAM 122. A fluctuation data reading operation for reading various fluctuation data temporarily stored, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from outside the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

  The RTC circuit 126 is a time measuring means capable of measuring the current time such as date, hour, minute and second. The RTC circuit 126 has a function of automatically adjusting the clock value to the Japan Standard Time using a radio clock. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC circuit 126 operates by receiving power supply from a backup power supply circuit (not shown). The timing information from the RTC circuit 126 is supplied to the effect control CPU 120 and the like.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 has a wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and a signal for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command to the audio control board 13. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illumination signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Further, the effect control board 12 has a wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation is renewably counted by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores, in the ROM 121, a determination table for determining whether or not to perform the effect such as a hold or the like. A pattern for determining an effect pattern such as a hold and the like, which is referred to for determining a display mode of the hold display and a display mode of the active display from time to time of digestion, may be stored.

  In the ROM 121, a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable role 17, etc.) are stored. The constituent data is stored. Each effect control pattern is configured from data indicating the control content of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, various effect operations are realized by setting effect control patterns. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting an effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. Withholding effects, active display effects, fanfare effects, effects during round games (opening effects, closing effects), ending effects, etc. are also realized by setting effect control patterns corresponding to the respective effects.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable object control data, and end code. It suffices if it is composed of data and the content of various effect control, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like are set in chronological order. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control and the like in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer. In this case, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. For example, data indicating switching timing of effect control and the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating a display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes, for example, data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data for specifying an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emission operation of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on an operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of a staging operation when the operation is detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data for designating an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. The movable accessory control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable accessory 17. That is, the movable accessory control data is data for specifying the operation of the movable accessory 17. Note that these control data need not be included in all effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include some control data in accordance with the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations performed in accordance with the contents of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation in accordance with various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data. During the validity period, an operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is accepted to perform control for determining the effect contents. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to an effect device that does not become a control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  The rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of a period (for example, a period for executing a notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the rendering operation in response to a predetermined period other than during the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which the ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state). Effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be simply specified. Thereafter, each time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer values. Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp) in accordance with the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9, movable control 17 etc.) is advanced. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, the display control data # 1 to display control data #n and the voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n. The data #n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data #n, the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data #n, the movable accessory control data # 1 to the movable accessory control data #n are the respective effects. It shows the control contents of the effect operation in the device, and constitutes effect control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data #n for specifying execution of effect control.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the accessory control board 16, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in a VRAM. Let it. In the voice control board 13 which receives the instruction from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. I have.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 includes a plurality of types of effect operation states such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and a plurality of states whose states can be updated according to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of the effect process flag, the high accuracy flag, the high base flag, and the like, data indicating a flag value, and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state. You.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting section 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value which is a storage value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of times of saving time and the number of probable changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of suspended storages. . When there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Specifically, four commands (first starting opening winning notification command, symbol designating command, variable category command, first pending storage number notification command) are one set or two commands (first starting opening winning notification). The main board 11 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A stores a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a first reserved storage number notification command among these commands transmitted from the main board 11, so that the buffer number can be stored for each buffer number. , A storage area for storing the symbol designation command, a storage area for storing the variable category command, and a storage area for storing the first reserved storage number notification command.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the first start winning in the storage area of the first start winning reception buffer 194A in association with each set. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 normally receives four commands (a first start opening winning notification command, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, and a first retained storage number notification command) at the time of the first starting winning, the free space is determined. No storage area is stored in any of the storage areas of the buffer numbers (the storage area for storing the symbol designation command, the storage area for storing the variable category command, and the storage area for storing the first pending storage number notification command). In each of the buffer number storage areas, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, and a first storage number notification command are stored. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, and a first reserved storage number notification command are stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number that is an empty area. Note that the example shown in FIG. 10B shows a state where commands are stored in the storage areas of the buffer numbers “1” to “3”. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 normally receives the two commands (the first start opening winning notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command) at the time of the first start winning, the CPU 120 stores the buffer number of the empty area. An area (a storage area for storing a symbol designation command (a storage area indicated as “designation” in FIG. 10B)) and a storage area for storing a fluctuation category command (shown as “variation category” in FIG. 10B) Storage area) and a buffer area in which nothing is stored in any of the storage areas for storing the first pending storage number notification command (the storage area indicated as “reservation storage number notification” in FIG. 10B). The storage area) stores the first reserved storage number notification command. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, the first reserved storage number notification command is stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number that is an empty area.

  The command stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is deleted one by one every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order between commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the received command is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship between the buffer numbers). For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Will be shifted.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of suspended storages. . When there is a start winning in the second starting winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Specifically, four commands (a second starting opening winning notification command, a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a second reserved storage number notification command) are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. You. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, of these commands transmitted from the main board 11, a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a second reserved storage number notification command can be stored for each buffer number. , A storage area for storing a symbol designation command, a storage area for storing a variable category command, and a storage area for storing a second reserved storage number notification command.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the second start winning in the storage area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B in association with each set. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 normally receives four commands (a second start opening winning notification command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a second reserved storage number notification command) at the time of the second start winning, the free space is determined. (A storage area for storing a symbol designating command (a storage area indicated as "designation design" in FIG. 10C)) and a storage area for storing a variable category command (FIG. 10C). Nothing is stored in any of the storage area indicated as “variable category” in FIG. 10 and the storage area for storing the second reserved storage number notification command (storage area indicated as “reserved storage number notification” in FIG. 10C). The symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the second reserved storage number notification command are stored in the respective storage areas of the buffer numbers that have not been set. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, and a second reserved storage number notification command are stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number that is an empty area. Note that the example shown in FIG. 10C shows a state where commands are stored in the storage areas of the buffer numbers “1” and “2”.

  The command stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C is deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order between commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the received command is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship between the buffer numbers). For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the present embodiment, data configuring the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the contents of the decision regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding each of the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is stored in another buffer in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifting to a number, the content associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data configuring the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second look-ahead notice buffer 194D, the contents of the decision regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding each of the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the suspended data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, etc., the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is stored in another buffer in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When shifting to a number, the content associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D is also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initialization after setting the interruption to be prohibited. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initialization is completed, an interrupt is permitted, and then a loop process is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process (including a sensor error notification process), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information and the like supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output (step). S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process in step S13, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process (step S14). In the game random number updating process of step S14, for example, at least a part of the game random numbers (for example, random number values MR1 to MR5) used on the main board 11 side is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 103 may update numerical data indicating a game random number counted by a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 by software.

  Subsequent to the game random number updating process in step S14, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a normal symbol process (step S16). By executing the normal symbol process processing, the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 is controlled, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are performed. Enables tilting operation setting and the like.

  Subsequent to the normal symbol processing, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main substrate 11 to a sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the output control included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting control data in an output port for transmitting a production control command to the substrate 12, setting predetermined control data in an output port of the production control INT signal, and setting the production control INT signal to an ON state for a predetermined time. For example, by setting the state to the off state, the effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a sensor error notification process (step S12) executed in the game control timer interrupt process. In the sensor error notification process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a magnet sensor signal indicating an abnormal value has been input from the magnet sensor (step S20). If the magnet sensor signal has not been input in step S20 (step S20; NO), the sensor error notification processing ends.

  When a magnet sensor signal is input in step S20 (step S20; YES), the CPU 103 determines that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, and sets a magnetic abnormality flag indicating that the magnetic abnormality has been detected (step S21). The error notification LED is turned on to notify that a magnetic abnormality has occurred (step S22), and a setting for transmitting a magnetic abnormality notification designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S23). Then, the sensor error notification processing ends. Note that the magnetic abnormality notification designation command set in step S23 is obtained, for example, by executing a command control process (step S17) of a game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the main-side error process ends. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether the first starting port switch 22A is ON (step S201). If it is determined in step S201 that the first starting port switch 22A is ON (step S201; YES), the CPU 103 sets the first special figure reserved storage number (the reserved number of the first special figure game) to a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not the upper limit is reached (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  When it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value (step S202; NO), the CPU 103 stores the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (starting The mouth buffer value is set to "1" (step S207). Subsequent to the process of step S207, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (FIG. 15) (step S208), and sets (clears) the starting port buffer value to “0” (step S209).

  When it is determined in step S201 that the first starting port switch 22A is not turned on (step S201 (NO)), when it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure pending storage number has reached the upper limit, (Step S202 (YES)), after executing the processing of step S209, the CPU 103 outputs the signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (step S203). If it is determined in step S203 that the second starting port switch 22B is ON (step S203; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the second special figure reserved storage number (the reserved number of the second special figure game) is a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not the upper limit is reached (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value (step S204; NO), the CPU 103 stores the stored value (startup) in the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. The mouth buffer value is set to "2" (step S210). Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (FIG. 15) (step S211), sets (clears) the starting port buffer value to “0” (step S212), and starts a winning determination process. To end.

  When it is determined in step S203 that the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure hold storage number has reached the upper limit value. (Step S204 (YES)), the start winning determination processing ends without performing the processing of Steps S210, S211 and S212.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 14, even when the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections. Can be completed.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning processing (steps S208 and S211). In the start winning prize processing shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first updates the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start opening buffer value so as to add 1 (step S215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is added by one, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is added by one. In this way, the first reserved storage number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition is satisfied. The second reserved storage number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the process of step S215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

  Subsequent to the process of step S216, the CPU 103 selects a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR1 for determining a jackpot type from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 of the above and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S218, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a start-up winning notification command corresponding to the start-up opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning notification command is performed. When the starting port buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the second starting port winning notification command is performed. The start opening winning notification command set in step S219 is mainly executed by executing a command control process (step S17) of a game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Subsequent to the process of step S219, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S220). After that, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command (step S221). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command is performed. When the starting port buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the second reserved storage number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process is terminated. It should be noted that the command for notifying the number of retained storages set in step S221 is obtained, for example, by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process ends. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the winning random number determination process (Step S220). In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first specifies the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 specifies whether or not the game is in the big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies that the big hit flag is in the ON state and that the game is in the big hit game state, and specifies that the big hit flag is not in the ON state (when the big hit flag is in the OFF state) and is not in the big hit game state. In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether the game is in the high base state or the low base state by checking the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies the high base state when the high base flag is on, and specifies the low base state when the high base flag is not on (when it is off). . Also, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether the game is in the high-accuracy state or the low-accuracy state by checking the state of the high-accuracy flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Good. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies that the high-accuracy flag is in the on-state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and specifies that the high-accuracy flag is in the low-accuracy state when it is not on (when it is off). You may.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game is in the big hit game state (step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game is in the big hit game state in the process of step S401. If it is determined in step S402 that the state is not the big hit gaming state (step S402; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state has been specified in the process of step S401.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the game is in the jackpot gaming state (step S402; YES), or if it is determined in step S403 that the game is in the high base state (step S403; YES), the CPU 103 sets the starting port buffer value. Is "2" (step S404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start winning (starting winning whose variation special figure is the second special figure). If it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S404; NO), the winning random number determination processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S403 that the state is not the high base state (step S403 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404 (YES)), The CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current game state (step S405). Specifically, when the high-accuracy state is not set, the CPU 103 determines from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. When the table data assigned to the special figure display result is set and the high accuracy state is set, the table data for the high accuracy state (“8000” to “8818”) is displayed from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special figure display result in which the range value is “big hit” is set.The CPU 103 specifies that the high-accuracy flag is in the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and sets the high-accuracy flag to the high-accuracy flag. When it is not in the ON state (when it is in the OFF state), it may be specified that it is in the low-probability state. When the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table are used, and when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table is used and the starting port is used. When the buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S405, the CPU 103 sets the numeric data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 within the predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether or not there is (step S406). For example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with the individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. Then, it is determined whether there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the minimum value (lower limit value) of the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1 and the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. ) May be compared with the maximum value (upper limit value) to determine whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the range between the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S406; YES), the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type extracted in step S217 of the startup winning process shown in FIG. 15 is shown. The big hit type is determined based on the numerical data (step S407). Specifically, first, the CPU 103 responds to a fluctuation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special diagram” corresponding to “2”) specified by the starting port buffer value. The big hit type determination table is set (selected). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets table data according to the fluctuation special map from the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 103 compares, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type with each of the jackpot type determination values in the jackpot type determination table data set according to the fluctuation special map. Then, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 may be determined.

  Subsequent to the process of step S407, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a symbol designating command according to the determination result of the process of step S407 to the effect control board 12 (step S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S406; NO), a setting for transmitting a design specification command corresponding to the loss to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S406). S409). The symbol designating command set in step S409 is mainly executed by executing a command control process (step S17) of a game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

After executing the processing of step S408 or the processing of step S409, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the vehicle is in the high base state (step S410). The processing in step S410 is performed in the following four scenes (scene 1 to scene 4).
(Scene 1)
A scene in which the game is not in the jackpot game state and is in the low base state (when step S402 (NO) and step S403 (NO)). It should be noted that there may be a first start winning (starting winning in which the variable special figure is the first special figure) or a second starting winning (starting winning in which the variable special figure is the second special figure). (Scene 2)
A scene in which the second starting prize is not in the big hit gaming state and in the high base state (step S402 (NO), step S403 (YES), step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 3)
When there is the second start winning in the jackpot game state and the low base state (step S402 (YES), step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 4)
When there is a second starting prize in the jackpot game state and the high base state (step S402 (YES), step S404 (YES)).

  If it is determined in step S410 that it is not in the high base state (step S410; NO), that is, if it is the above-mentioned scene 1 or the above-mentioned scene 3, the CPU 103 sets the low-base state for the special figure display result. A prefetch determination table is set (selected) (step S411). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S410 that the vehicle is in the high base state (step S410; YES), that is, if the scene is scene 2 or scene 4, the CPU 103 sets the high base state according to the special figure display result. A pre-reading determination table is set (selected) (step S412).

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a prefetch determination table and the like. FIG. 17A is an example of the configuration of a look-ahead determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is determined as “losing” in the low base state. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a look-ahead determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing” in the high base state. FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a look-ahead determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state or the high base state. FIG. 17D is a setting example of the variable category command. The “specific pattern” is a variation pattern that becomes a super-reach variation pattern regardless of the number of stored memories. The “non-specific pattern” is a variation pattern other than the “specific pattern”.

  The look-ahead determination table of FIG. 17A is set based on the setting of the variation category determination table shown in FIG. 20A, which is referred to when the special figure display result is “missed” in the low base state. I have. According to the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20A, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is any one of “97” to “99”, the super reach fluctuation category (variation Categories “PA4” and “PA5”). That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is any one of “97” to “99”, the super reach fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3”) regardless of the number of stored memories. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is "losing" in the low base state, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is at least any one of "97" to "99", at the time of starting winning or variable display start. Regardless of the number of stored memories at the time (at the time of the change), a specific change pattern (specific pattern) called a super reach change pattern is determined. Therefore, in the look-ahead determination table of FIG. 17A, a value in the range of “97” to “99” is assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern” are assigned. A value in the range of “96” is assigned.

  The look-ahead determination table of FIG. 17B is set based on the setting of the variation category determination table shown in FIG. 20B and referred to when the special figure display result is “missed” in the high base state. I have. According to the fluctuation category determination table in FIG. 20B, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is any one of “89” to “99”, the super reach fluctuation category (variation Categories "PA4", "PA5"). That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “89” to “99”, the super reach variation pattern (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3”) is obtained regardless of the number of storage reservations. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is “losing” in the high base state, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is at least one of “89” to “99”, the start-up winning or the variable display start The specific pattern is determined regardless of the number of stored memories at the time (at the time of the change). Therefore, in the look-ahead determination table of FIG. 17B, values in the range of “89” to “99” are assigned to “specific patterns”, and “0” to “non-specific patterns” other than “specific patterns”. A value in the range of “88” is assigned.

  The look-ahead determination table in FIG. 17C includes a fluctuation category determination table referred to when the special figure display result is set to “big hit” in the low base state shown in FIG. 20C, and FIG. It is set based on the fluctuation category determination table referred to when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" in the high base state shown. According to the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20 (C) and the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20 (D), if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is any of “60” to “99”, Regardless of the number of reserved storages, the super reach fluctuation category (the fluctuation category “PB4”, “PB5”) is determined. That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “60” to “99”, the super reach variation pattern (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3”) is obtained regardless of the number of stored memories. , The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the low base state or the high base state, at least if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of "60" to "99", the start winning prize Alternatively, a specific pattern is determined irrespective of the number of stored memories at the start of variable display (at the time of the change). Therefore, in the look-ahead determination table of FIG. 17C, a value in the range of “60” to “99” is assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern”. A value in the range of “59” is assigned.

  Therefore, in the process of step S411 executed when it is determined that the state is not the high base state in step S410, the CPU 103 determines in FIG. Table data constituting the look-ahead determination table shown in (A) is set, and if it is determined in step S406 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the look-ahead shown in FIG. Set the table data that constitutes the judgment table.

  In the process of step S412 executed when it is determined in step S410 that the vehicle is in the high base state, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “losing” in step S406. Table data constituting the look-ahead determination table shown in (B) is set, and if it is determined in step S406 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the look-ahead shown in FIG. Set the table data that constitutes the judgment table.

  After executing the processing of step S411 or the processing of step S412, the CPU 103 determines whether the variation pattern is a “non-specific pattern” or a “specific pattern” based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category. It is determined whether there is a pre-read (step S413). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category extracted in step S217 of the start winning processing shown in FIG. 15 and the prefetching set in step S411 or S412. Either the judgment value of the “non-specific pattern” or the judgment value of the “specific pattern” is determined by comparing the judgment value of the “non-specific pattern” or the judgment value of the “specific pattern” in the judgment table data. What is necessary is just to judge whether it matches the numerical data shown.

  Subsequent to the process of step S413, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the variable category command according to the determination result (pre-read determination) in step S413 (step S414), and ends the winning random number determination process. In the process of step S414, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting for transmitting any of the variable category commands shown in FIG. 17D according to the determination result in the process of step S413. Specifically, in the processing of step S413, when it is determined that the pattern is a non-specific pattern (losing), the transmission setting for transmitting the fluctuation category command in which the EXT data is set to “00” to the effect control board 12 is set. When it is determined that the pattern is a specific pattern (losing), a transmission setting for transmitting a variation category command in which EXT data is set to “01” to the effect control board 12 is performed, and a non-specific pattern (big hit) is set. When it is determined that there is, the transmission setting for transmitting the fluctuation category command in which the EXT data is set to “02” to the effect control board 12 is performed, and when it is determined that the pattern is the specific pattern (big hit), the EXT data is “03”. The transmission setting for transmitting the fluctuation category command in which "" is set to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S101), the CPU 103 selects and executes any one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. .

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process is a process of determining a variation pattern based on a variable display result or the like determined in advance in the special symbol normal process (step S110), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation start command. (Or a second change start command) and the like. In the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol changing process in step S112 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process is a process of varying (variably displaying) a special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, or the elapsed time after the start of the variation is changed to the special symbol variation time (FIG. 5). It includes a process of determining whether or not the time has been reached. In the special symbol change process, when the elapsed time after the start of the change reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process is a process of stopping the change of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and stopping (displaying) the determined special symbol, or the big hit flag is turned off. (When the variable display result is determined to be "losing" in the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in advance, it is determined in advance) as a process to be executed. Setting processing for transmitting a hit start designation command (Fanfare command) as processing or processing to be executed when the big hit flag is on (when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance). And so on. In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is in the off state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and when the big hit flag is in the on state, the special figure process flag is changed. Is updated to “4”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is a processing executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing is a process for setting a special winning opening to an open state (for example, setting a solenoid drive signal for the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door for opening the big winning opening, and the like). , And a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening opening notification command and the like. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening processing is performed based on whether the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time, whether the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 has reached the predetermined number, or the like. Processing for determining the timing of returning the winning opening from the open state to the closing state, and setting for closing the winning opening (for example, for the solenoid 82 for the winning opening door for closing the winning opening) The process includes a process for setting a solenoid drive signal, and a setting process for transmitting a notification command after opening of the special winning opening. In the big hit opening process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-big hit release process in step S116 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The big hit opening processing is a processing for determining whether the number of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the maximum winning opening number or the maximum winning opening number. The processing to be executed includes a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening opening notification command, and a setting process for transmitting a hit end designation command as a process to be executed when the maximum winning opening number is reached. In. In the post-win jackpot opening process, when the number of rounds executed has not reached the maximum winning opening opening number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and when the maximum winning opening opening number has been reached, The value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process is a process for determining whether or not the big hit end production wait time (a wait time corresponding to the ending production execution period) has elapsed, or a process to be executed when the big hit end production wait time has elapsed. The processing includes a process of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a high-accuracy and high-base state, a process of setting the number of STs, and the number of time reductions. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

  The big hit opening process (step S115), the big hit opening process (step S116), the big hit opening pre-process (step S114), and the big hit ending process (step S117) are executed when the count switch 23 is turned on. It includes a transmission setting for transmitting the winning a prize notification command.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol normal process (step S110). In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S231, the count value of the second reserved storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reservation storage number is not “0” (step S231; NO), the CPU 103 determines the special figure from the reservation number “1” of the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. The hold data (numerical data) of the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are respectively read out and temporarily stored (step S232). In other words, when there is a hold (hold data) of the second special figure game, the CPU 103 stores the change in the second special figure hold storage unit regardless of whether the first special figure game is held or not. Numerical data (reserved data of the second special figure game extracted in step S217 first (earliest)) corresponding to the reserved number “1” of 151B is read out and temporarily stored in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like. .

  Subsequent to the process in step S232, the CPU 103 decrements the second special figure reservation storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (see FIG. 8) by one, and also executes the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B (FIG. 8) (step S233). Specifically, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 decrements the second hold storage count value by one, and stores an entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number) in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total pending storage count value. Subsequent to the process of step S233, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to “2” (step S234).

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S231; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special figure reserved storage number is “0”. A determination is made (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Just fine.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the first special figure reservation storage number is not “0” (step S235; NO), the CPU 103 starts the special figure reservation from the reservation number “1” of the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A. The hold data (numerical data) of the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are respectively read and temporarily stored (step S236). That is, when there is no hold (holding data) of the second special figure game (step S231 (YES)), and when there is a hold of the first special figure game, the CPU 103 sets Numerical data (reserved data of the first special figure game extracted first in step S217) corresponding to the reserved number “1” in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A is read out, and a random number buffer for fluctuation is read out. Store it temporarily, for example.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, the CPU 103 decrements the first special figure reservation storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (see FIG. 8) by one, and the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A (FIG. 8) (step S237). Specifically, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first reserved storage number count value, and stores an entry lower than the reserved number “1” in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A (for example, the reserved number “1”). The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value. Subsequent to the process of step S237, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to “1” (step S238).

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. When the game and the game are suspended, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. The second special figure game is not limited to the mode executed prior to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). ), And the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start prize (first start prize, second start prize) is generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning prize has occurred, and determine whether to execute the first special figure game or the second special figure game from the stored data.

  After executing the processing of step S234 or the processing of step S238, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current game state (step S239). For example, the CPU 103 may set the special figure display result determination table as in step S405 of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (a first special figure display result determination table and a second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S405, the starting port buffer Although the value ("1" or "2") is referred to, the process of step S239 may refer to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value ("1" or "2").

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 displays the special figure display based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the special figure display result determination table set in step S239. The result is determined (step S240). In the process of step S240, as in step S406 of the random number value determination process at the time of winning (step S220) shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 sets the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the special figure display result set in step S239. In the table data for determination, the special figure display result (whether “big hit” or “losing”) is determined by, for example, comparing each judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” one by one. do it.

  Subsequent to the process of step S240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is "big hit" (step S241). If it is determined in step S241 that it is a "big hit" (step S241; YES), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an ON state (step S242). The big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end processing in step S117. Subsequent to the process of step S242, the CPU 103 executes a jackpot type determination process (S244). The jackpot type determination process in step S244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. Subsequent to the jackpot type determination processing in step S244, the CPU 103 stores, for example, the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination processing in step S244. The big hit type buffer value is set (step S245). That is, it stores what the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S244 is. As an example, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type buffer value to “1” if the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S244 is “16R probability variable hit”, and if the jackpot type is “8R probability variable hit”, the big hit type Set "2" to the buffer value.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S241 (NO)), or after executing the process of step S245, the CPU 103 determines in advance whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state. Sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the result of determining the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state (step S248). Subsequent to the process of step S248, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “1”, which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting processing (step S249), and ends the special special pattern normal processing.

  If it is determined in step S235 that the number of reserved games in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S250) is executed, and the special symbol is set. The normal processing ends. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Then, it is determined whether or not transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demo display setting ends. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting ends.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change pattern setting process (step S111). In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S250). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable symbol display result is determined in advance to be "big hit" in the special symbol normal process (step S110). When it is determined that the big hit flag is in the ON state (step S250; YES), an effect control command (display result designation command) corresponding to the big hit type (16R certain variable big hit, 8R certain variable big hit) determined in step S244. Transmission setting is performed (step S251). When it is determined that the big hit flag is not in the ON state (step S250; NO), transmission setting of an effect control command (display result designation command) indicating loss is performed (step S252).

  After executing the processing of step S251 or the processing of step S252, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the vehicle is in the high base state (step S253). If it is determined in step S253 that the state is not the high base state (step S253; NO), the CPU 103 sets (selects) the fluctuation category determination table data for the low base state according to the special figure display result ( Step S254). More specifically, if the CPU 103 determines in step S250 that the big hit flag is not in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines a low-basis / losing-time fluctuation category determination table (the fluctuation category determination table shown in FIG. 20A). Table data constituting the table is set, and if it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is ON, the fluctuation category determination table for the low base / big hit (shown in FIG. 20C) Table data constituting the fluctuation category determination table) is set.

  If it is determined in step S253 that the vehicle is in the high base state (step S253; YES), the CPU 103 sets (selects) the fluctuation category determination table data for the high base state according to the special figure display result ( Step S255). Specifically, if the CPU 103 determines in step S250 that the big hit flag is not in the ON state, the variation category determination table for high base / losing (variation category determination shown in FIG. 20B) Table data constituting the table is set, and if it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is on, the fluctuation category determination table for high base / big hit (shown in FIG. 20D) Table data constituting the fluctuation category determination table) is set.

  After executing the processing of step S254 or the processing of step S255, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation category based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category (step S256). More specifically, the CPU 103 calculates the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation, and the number of stored suspended category determination table data set in step S254 or S255. It is sufficient to determine the fluctuation category that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 by comparing the judgment value with the judgment value.

  As an example, when the table data constituting the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20A is set in step S254, and the number of reserved storages is “0” or “1” (the reserved storage related to the prize). If there is no pending storage other than the above, or if there is one pending storage), the CPU 103 determines that the fluctuation category “0” to “69” when the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation category PA2 ”is determined, and when it is in the range of“ 70 ”to“ 89 ”, the variation category“ PA3 ”is determined. When it is in the range of“ 90 ”to“ 98 ”, the variation category“ PA4 ”is determined, and“ 99 ”is determined. , The variation category “PA5” is determined.

  In the case where the table data constituting the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20A is set in step S254 and the number of reserved storages is in the range of “2” or “3” (other than the reserved storage related to the winning). CPU 103 holds two or three pending storages), the CPU 103 determines that the fluctuation category “PA1” when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is in the range of “0” to “3”. Is determined, and the variation category “PA2” is determined when the variation category is “4” to “79”, and the variation category “PA3” is determined when the variation category is “80” to “96”. When it is in the range of “98”, the fluctuation category “PA4” is determined, and when it is “99”, the fluctuation category “PA5” is determined.

  In the case where the table data constituting the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20A is set in step S254 and the number of reserved storages is in the range of “4” (the reserved storage other than the reserved storage related to the prize is not stored). If there are four), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation category “PA1” when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is in the range of “0” to “63”, and “64”. When it is in the range of “79” to “79”, the variation category “PA2” is determined. When it is in the range of “80” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined, and it is in the range of “97” to “98”. Sometimes, the variation category “PA4” is determined, and when it is “99”, the variation category “PA5” is determined.

  When the table data constituting the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20C is set in step S254, the CPU 103 sets the numerical value indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category regardless of the number of reserved storages. When the data is in the range of “0” to “9”, the fluctuation category “PB1” is determined. When the data is in the range of “10” to “59”, the fluctuation category “PB3” is determined. When it is in the range of “89”, the fluctuation category “PB4” is determined, and when it is in the range of “90” to “99”, the fluctuation category “PB5” is determined.

  The same applies to the case where the table data constituting the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20B or the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20D is set in step S255.

  Subsequent to the process in step S256, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern based on the variation category determined in step S256 and the random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern (step S257). In the process of step S257, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category determined in step S256, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is set to any variation pattern. May be determined based on whether the variation pattern is within the range.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table. In the process of step S257, for example, when the variation category “PA2” is determined in step S256, the CPU 103 sets a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA2” illustrated in FIG. Selection), and when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is in the range of “0” to “39”, the variation pattern “PA2-1” is determined, and the range of “40” to “99” is determined. , The variation pattern “PA2-2” is determined. Further, for example, when the variation category “PA3” is determined in step S256, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA3” illustrated in FIG. When the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is in the range of “0” to “79”, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” is determined. When the numerical data is in the range of “80” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern is determined. The pattern “PA3-2” is determined. The same applies to the case where another variation category is determined in step S256.

  Note that the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of executing the process, or similar to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, etc., in step S217 of the startup winning process (step S208, step S211). , May be extracted as reserved data and read out in step S232 (or step S236) of the special symbol normal processing (step S110).

  Subsequent to the process of step S257, the CPU 103 sets transmission of an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) according to the determined variation pattern (step S258). The CPU 103 sets the transmission of the first variation start command for designating the start of the first special figure game (or the second variation start command for designating the start of the second special figure game) in addition to the variation pattern designation command. May be performed. Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fluctuation time timer value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 (step S259), and sets a value of the special figure process flag. Is updated to "2" corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S260), and the variation pattern setting process ends. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S260, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol change processing is executed.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing (step S113). In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first stops the change of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and stops and displays (derives) the fixed special symbol. After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable symbol display result is determined in advance to be "big hit" in the special symbol normal process (step S110). If it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start effect waiting time (step S292). For example, in the processing of step S292, a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the jackpot start effect waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the process of step S292, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Subsequent to the process of step S293, the CPU 103 sets the low-probability low-base state (step S294). In the process of step S294, for example, the CPU 103 may clear and set the high-accuracy flag and the high-base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the off state, respectively. When the low-probability low-base state has already been set, the processing in step S294 may be omitted. Subsequent to the process of step S294, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-big hit opening process (step S295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  If it is determined in step S291 that the big hit flag is not in the ON state (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a change-time game state transition process (step S296). The CPU 103 executes, for example, the following processing as the transitional game state transition processing. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the low-probability low-base state, and if not, adds 1 to the value of the variation counter. The variation number counter is the number of times the special figure game is executed after being controlled to the low-probability low-base state, and is the number of times that is compared with the number of times of ST (the number of times of positive variation) and the number of times of saving. The number of times of ST (probable change number) is the number of times the variable display game that executes the probable change control is performed. The number of time savings is the number of times the variable display game that executes the time savings control is executed. The number of times of ST (probable number of times) and the number of times of saving are set in the big hit end processing (step S117). The CPU 103 that has added 1 to the value of the variation number counter compares the value of the variation number counter after adding 1 with the number of STs. If the value of the variation number counter is larger than the number of STs, the CPU 103 determines that the game state is low and low. In addition to setting the base state, the set values of the number of times of ST and the number of time savings may be cleared to “0”. In this embodiment, since the number of times saved and the number of times ST are the same (both 70 times), the value of the variation counter after adding 1 may be compared with the number of times saved. If the number of times saved is different from the number of times ST, each of them may be compared individually. That is, the CPU 103 compares the value of the variation counter after 1 addition with the number of time savings, and if the value of the variation counter is greater than the number of time savings, sets the low base state. May be compared with the ST count, and if the value of the variation number counter is larger than the ST count, the state may be set to a low accuracy state.

  Subsequent to the fluctuating game state transition processing of step S296, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “0” corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S297), and ends the special symbol stop processing. I do.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit end process (step S117). In the big hit end processing shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-big hit opening process (step S116) shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7", a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the big hit end effect waiting time is set. The value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates the game control process timer value by, for example, subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value. It may be determined whether or not the jackpot end effect rendering time has elapsed, depending on whether or not it is determined.

  If it is determined in step S311 that the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has not elapsed (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S311 that the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S311). S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the high-accuracy state (probable-change state) by turning on the high-accuracy flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the high base provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the high base state by, for example, turning on the high base (step S315). That is, by the processing of steps S314 and S315, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to the high-accuracy high base state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the number of times of ST (the number of times of change) to 70 (step S316), and sets the number of time savings to 70 (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the variation counter that is compared with the number of times of ST and the number of times of saving to "0" (step S318), and clears (resets) the big hit flag to an off state (step S319). The value of the process flag is updated to “0” corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S320), and the big hit end processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of times of ST (the number of times of change) and the set value of the number of times of time saving of 70 are set to the same value (both 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the number of times of ST (probable number of changes) in the case of 8R probability of change and the set value of the number of times of ST (probability of change) in the case of 16R probability of change are the same value (both 70 times). However, the set value of the number of times of ST (probable number of changes) in the case of the 8R probability of change and the set value of the number of times of ST (probable number of changes) in the case of the 16R probability of change may be different values. In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of time savings in the case of the 8R probability variable hit and the set value of the number of time savings in the case of the 16R probability variable hit are set to the same value (both 70 times). May be different from the set value of the number of time savings in the case of the 16R probability big hit. When the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the big hit type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability change jackpot. If the set values of the number of times of ST (the number of times of probability change) and the number of time savings are not different between the case of the 8R probability change jackpot and the case of the 16R probability change hit (when the same value is set), the process of step S312 Buffer value reading) may be omitted.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in FIG.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and mounts the effect control board 12 on the effect control board 12. The register setting and the like of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) performed are performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag has not been turned on (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control to be a production control command or the like is performed from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. For example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If it is determined in step S72 that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72; YES), effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag to turn it off (step S73). A command analysis process is performed (step S74). In the command analysis processing executed in step S74, for example, after reading out various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the issued effect control commands are performed.

  Subsequent to the command analysis process in step S74, the effect control CPU 120 executes an error notification process (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed for an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet.

  Subsequent to the error notification processing in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control process (step S76). In the effect control process of step S76, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable role 17, etc.) are used based on the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11. Judgment, determination, setting, and the like relating to the effect action performed are performed.

  Subsequent to the effect control process process of step S76, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect random number update process (step S77). In the effect random number updating process of step S77, for example, at least a part of the effect random number used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 may update the numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 by software. After that, the process returns to the step S72.

  Note that the effect control board 12 side has described that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 11 is an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. However, a method of generating an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request based on the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the command analysis process (step S74). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the storage content of the effect control command reception buffer, for example, by receiving the received command from the main board 11 It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). If it is determined that there is no received command (step S501; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis processing.

  If it is determined in step S501 that there is a received command (step S501; YES), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a first start-up winning notification command (step S502). . The effect control CPU 120 may check the MODE data of the received command, for example, and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 3).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first startup opening winning notification command (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S503). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value predetermined as the reception waiting time of the first hold number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the received command is not the first startup opening winning notification command (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is the second startup opening winning notification command. (Step S504). If it is determined in step S504 that the command is the second start-up winning notification command (step S504; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a second reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S505). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value predetermined as a reception waiting time of the second hold number notification command in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second starting opening winning notification command (step S504; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a symbol designating command (step S506). ). If it is determined in step S506 that the received command is not a symbol designation command (step S506; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that the received command is not the variable category command (step S507; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S508). ). If it is determined in step S508 that the command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is initialized by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S509).

  If it is determined in step S508 that the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command (step S508; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command. (Step S510). If it is determined in step S510 that the command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510; YES), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is initialized by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S511).

  If it is determined in step S506 that the command is a symbol designating command (step S506 (YES)), if it is determined in step S507 that the command is a variable category command (step S507 (YES)), step S503, step S505, After executing any one of the processes of step S509 and step S511, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received command in an empty area in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. (Step S512). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received command is the first starting opening winning notification command or that the starting opening winning notification command immediately before the receiving command is the first starting opening winning notification command. In the case (when the second start-up winning notification command is not received after the first starting-winning notification command is received), the received command is stored in an empty area in the first start-winning reception command buffer 194A, When the received command is the second starting opening winning notification command, or when the starting opening winning notification command immediately before the receiving command is the second starting opening winning notification command (the second starting opening winning notification command is received). If the first start-up winning notification command has not been received after the start-up), the received command is transferred to the second start-up receiving command buffer 194. Stored in the free space in. Subsequent to the process in step S512, the process returns to step S501.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; NO), effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation pattern designation command. (Step S513). If it is determined that the command is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), effect control CPU 201 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S515). . Subsequent to the process in step S515, the process returns to step S501.

  If it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to each of the other received commands (step S518). For example, when the received command is a game state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the game state designation command and specify the current game state. Subsequent to the process in step S518, the process returns to step S501.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the error notification process (Step S75). In the error notification process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not an error notification period has elapsed (step S141). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a notification control pattern (which may have the same configuration as the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 9) corresponding to the error notification has already been set as a use pattern. If it is already set, it may be determined whether or not the error notification period is based on the set contents (notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  If it is not the notification period of the error notification in step S141 (step S141; NO), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142). If the magnetic abnormality notification designation command has not been received (step S142; NO), the error notification process ends.

  If a magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) error notification operation control on the uppermost layer (Z value = 0). (Step S143), the error notification process ends. Also, in the case where it is the error notification notification period in step S141 (step S141; YES), the error notification operation control is executed (continued) in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0) (step S143). The error notification processing ends. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets a notification control pattern corresponding to the error notification of the magnetic abnormality as a use pattern, and sends a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set notification control pattern. An error notification image (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 28 (A)) corresponding to the error notification of the magnetic anomaly is displayed by transmitting it to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of the Z value and the like of various images. FIG. 27A is a diagram exemplifying an image (image name) and an image size (image display area) corresponding to each effect, notification, and the like executed in the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, when performing the error notification, an error notification image of the image size “large” is displayed in the display area. In other words, the error notification is performed using the error notification image of the image size “large”. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 27A, the effect execution notification is executed using the effect execution notification image of the image size “small”, and the special effect effect using the special effect effect effect image of the image size “large”. An effect is executed, a hold etc. display (hold display, active display) is executed using the hold etc. display image of the image size "small", and a group announcement effect is executed using a group notice effect image of the image size "large". Then, the chance zone effect is executed using the chance zone effect image of the image size “small”, and the step-up notice effect is executed using the step-up notice effect image of the image size “large”.

  The effect execution notification shown in FIG. 27A is a notification that the notification target effect has been executed. In the present embodiment, step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, the group notice effect, and each of the character effects correspond to the notification target effect. That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect execution notification, when SU5 is executed, the effect that SU5 has been executed is reported, and when the group notice effect is executed, the fact that the group notice effect has been executed is reported. Then, when the character effect is executed, it is notified that the character effect is executed.

  FIG. 27B is a diagram exemplifying the Z value set for each image shown in FIG. The Z value setting table in which the Z value of each image shown in FIG. 27A is set is stored in the RAM 122. As shown in FIG. 27B, the Z value of each image is set in the Z value setting table. The Z value indicates a layer (layer) for displaying an image. As the Z value is smaller, the image is displayed on the layer on the front side (front side, upper side) in the depth direction, and as the Z value is larger, the back side (rear side, lower side) in the depth direction is displayed. The image is displayed on the layer. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 27B, when the error notification image of the Z value “0” and the chance zone effect image of the Z value “7” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the chance of the Z value “7” is displayed. An error notification image of the Z value “0” is displayed in front of the zone effect image. Further, for example, when a group announcement effect image with a Z value of “6”, a chance zone effect image with a Z value of “7”, and a step-up announcement effect image with a Z value of “8” are displayed in a superimposed manner, A chance zone effect image of Z value “7” is displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image of “8”, and a group notice effect image of Z value “6” is in front of the chance zone effect image of Z value “7”. Is displayed. Note that the above-described images and Z values are examples. For example, the Z value of the decorative design (image of the variable display effect of the decorative design) is “9”, and the Z value of the background (background image) is “10”.

  It should be noted that the Z value of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 27 (B) starts notification when the number of notifications is 3 (when the execution of three effects of SU5, group announcement effect, and character effect is notified). When the order is the third, the notification start order is “1”, and when the number of notifications is 2 or more (when the execution of two or more of the SU5, group announcement production, and character production production is reported), the notification start order is 2 If it is the second time, the notification start order is “2”, and if the number of notifications is 1 or more (in the case where the execution of one or more of the group announcement effect and the character effect effect is notified), the notification start order is first. Sometimes it is "3".

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are diagrams illustrating examples of various images. FIG. 28A shows an error notification image (an example). The error notification image shown in FIG. 28A includes a pictogram image G1 for notifying that an error has occurred, and a character image G2 for notifying a message "Error has occurred! Please call a clerk." The display time of the error notification image (the notification time of the error notification) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the error notification image may be changed according to the type of error.

  The image size of the error notification image shown in FIG. 27A is a display area in which the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2 are combined. That is, the display area combining the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2 is “large”. The pictogram image G1 and the character image G2 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 28A, and are compared with other plural images (or without being compared with other plural images), and are images of the error notification image. What is necessary is just to say that a size is "large". It should be noted that an image whose image size falls within the upper predetermined number (for example, the fourth) may be referred to as an image size “large”, and an image that does not fall within the upper predetermined number may be referred to as an image size “small”. Further, an image in which the ratio of the image size to the display area of the image display device 5 is equal to or more than a predetermined ratio (for example, 30%) is referred to as an image size “large”, and an image less than the predetermined ratio is referred to as an image size “small”. Good.

  FIG. 28B illustrates an effect execution notification image (an example). The effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 28 (B) includes a pictogram image G3 that informs the executed notification target effect (step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, group notice effect, character object effect) so as to be specified. Contains. The pictogram image G3 is a general term for a part or all of the pictogram images G3-1 to G3-3 (described later). The display time of the effect execution notification image (the notification time of the effect execution notification) may be, for example, 20 seconds. The display time of the effect execution notification image may be varied according to the type of the notification target effect.

  The image size of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area of the pictogram image G3. That is, the display area of the pictogram image G3 is “small”. The pictogram image G3 is not limited to the image shown in FIG. 28B, but is compared with other images (or without being compared with other images), and the image size of the effect execution notification image is “ Anything that can be said to be "small" is acceptable.

  FIG. 28D shows the vicinity of the pictogram image G3 in FIG. 28B in detail. In FIG. 28 (D), the pictogram image G3-1 reports the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “3”. Further, in FIG. 28 (D), the pictogram image G3-2 notifies the second effect in the notification start order when the notification number is 3, and the Z value is “2”. Further, in FIG. 28 (D), the pictogram image G3-3 notifies the third effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “1”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (D), a pictogram image G3-2 of Z value "2" is displayed in front of the pictogram image G3-1 of Z value "3", and a pictogram image G3 of Z value "2". The pictogram image G3-3 of the Z value "1" is displayed on the front of -2.

  In FIG. 28 (E), the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order in the case of the notification number 2, and the Z value is “3”. Further, in FIG. 28 (E), the pictogram image G3-2 notifies the second effect in the notification start order in the case of the notification number 2, and the Z value is “2”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28E, a pictogram image G3-2 having a Z value of "2" is displayed in front of the pictogram image G3-1 having a Z value of "3". Further, in FIG. 28 (F), the pictogram image G3-1 reports the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 1, and the Z value is “3”.

  FIG. 28 (C) shows an accessory effect effect image (an example). The character effect effect image shown in FIG. 28C includes an effect image G4 that gives a visual effect to the character effect (specifically, movement (down) of the movable character 17). The display time of the character effect effect image (execution time of the character effect effect) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the character effect effect image may be varied according to the operation mode of the movable character 17.

  The image size of the accessory effect effect image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area of the effect image G4. That is, the display area of the effect image G4 is “large”. The effect image G4 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 28C, and is compared with other plural images (or without being compared with other plural images), and the image size of the accessory effect effect image is reduced. Anything that can be said to be "large" may be used.

  FIG. 29A illustrates a display image (one example) of a hold or the like. The hold etc. display image shown in FIG. 29 (A) includes a first hold display image G5, a second hold display image G6, and an active display image G7. The display time of the first hold display image G5 and the second hold display image G6 differs depending on the number of hold displays, the time required for each hold display (display time of each variable display), and the like. The display time of the active display image G7 differs depending on the display time of the variable display. Note that the display image such as a hold may include an image indicating the active display area AHA.

  The image size of the hold etc. display image shown in FIG. 27 (A) is the display area combining the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7. It is. That is, the display area of the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7 is "small". The first hold display image G5, the second hold display image G6, and the active display image G7 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 29 (A), and may be compared with other multiple images (or with other multiple images). It is sufficient that the image size of the display image such as the hold image is “small”.

  FIG. 29B shows a group announcement effect image (one example). The group announcement effect image shown in FIG. 29B includes a character image G8 forming a group. The display time of the character image G8 (the execution time of the group announcement effect) may be, for example, 5 seconds. The display time of the group announcement effect image may be changed according to the character image G8 displayed in the group announcement effect.

  The image size of the group announcement effect image shown in FIG. 27B is the display area of the character image G8. That is, the display area of the character image G8 is “large”. The character image G8 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 29B, and is compared with other images (or without being compared with other images), and the image size of the group announcement effect image is “ Anything that can be said to be "large" is acceptable.

  FIG. 29C shows a chance zone effect image (one example). The chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 29 (C) includes a character image G9 for notifying a message “CHANCE!” And a pictogram image G10 for notifying that it is a chance. The chance zone effect image may include one of the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10. The display time of the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 (the execution time of the chance zone effect) differs depending on the number of hold displays, the time required for each hold display (display time of each variable display), and the like.

  The image size of the chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 27B is a display area in which the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10 are combined. That is, the display area including the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10 is “small”. The character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 are not limited to those shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to be able to say that the image size is "small".

  FIG. 29D illustrates a step-up notice effect image (one example). The step-up notice effect images include a frame image G11 displayed last in step 1 (SU1), a frame image G12 displayed last in step 2 (SU2), a frame image G13 displayed last in step 3 (SU3), and a step. 4 (SU4), a frame image G14 to be displayed last in Step 5 (SU5), and the like. That is, the display area is enlarged each time the step is raised. Characters and the like are displayed in the frame images G11 to G15 according to SU1 to SU5, but are not shown. The display time of each of the frame images G11 to G15 may be, for example, 1 second (thus, for example, 5 seconds when proceeding to SU5).

  The image size of the step-up notice effect image shown in FIG. 27B is based on the display area of the frame image G15. That is, the display area of the frame image G15 is “large”. The frame image G15 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 29 (D), and is compared with other images (or without being compared with other images), and the image size of the step-up notice effect image is changed. Anything that can be said to be "large" may be used.

  FIG. 30 is a conceptual diagram schematically illustrating layers of various images. In FIG. 30, the number on the Z axis is the Z value. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 27B, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image having the Z value “0” is displayed on the foreground layer, and the effect having the Z value “1” is displayed. The execution notification image (third) is displayed on a layer behind one of the error notification images, and the effect execution notification image (second) having the Z value “2” is displayed on the back of one of the effect execution notification images (third). The effect execution notification image (first) displayed on the layer and having the Z value “3” is displayed on the layer one behind the effect execution notification image (second), and the character effect effect having the Z value “4” The image is displayed on a layer behind one of the effect execution notification images (third), a hold etc. display image having a Z value “5” is displayed on a layer behind one of the character effect effect images, and the Z value “ 6 "is one back of the display image such as hold , A chance zone effect image having a Z value of “7” is displayed on a layer behind one of the group announcement effect images, and a step-up announcement effect image having a Z value of “8” is included in the group announcement effect image. One is displayed on the back layer.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. 31 (A) shows a display operation of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the step-up notice effect (SU4), the chance zone effect, the group notice effect, the hold, etc., and the effect execution notification (group notice effect) overlap. An example is shown. FIG. 31 (B) shows a step-up announcement effect (SU5), a chance zone effect, a group effect effect, a hold display, a character effect effect, an effect effect notification (SU5), an effect effect information (group effect effect), and an effect effect. The display operation example in the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the notification (principal product effect) are overlapped is shown. As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, an image having a large Z value is drawn on the back side according to the Z value of FIG. 27B, and an image having a small Z value is located on the near side. Is drawn so as to overlap with.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S76). In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 32, effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect effect determination process (step S150). In the prize-winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents stored in the start prize reception command buffer (first start prize reception command buffer 194A or the second start prize reception command buffer 194B). For example, a process of determining whether or not a start-up winning notification command has been received as a reception command, a process of determining an effect such as holding, and the like are executed.

  Subsequent to the prize-winning effect determination process (step S150), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the processes of steps S170 to 177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. And run.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the like transmitted from the main board 11 are received. The processing includes determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in the device 5. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started (that is, when a variation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process corresponds to the setting for performing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (for example, , Processing for performing an effect control pattern corresponding to a fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time), setting of a fluctuation time timer, and the like, and performing display operations such as a first hold display, a second hold display, and an active display. The processing includes setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the display operation). In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. The variable display effect processing is to determine whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting processing (step S171) has timed out (the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is the special figure variable time). ) Is determined. In the variable display effect processing, when the variable time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special figure waiting process is a process in which the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set as a process to be executed when the confirmed decorative symbol is "losing". The processing to be executed includes a process for setting a fanfare effect (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect). In the special figure waiting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0” when the finalized decorative symbol is “losing”, and when the finalized decorative symbol is “big hit”, Update the value to “4”.

  The big hit start process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not a special winning opening opening notification command is received, and a process during opening when the special winning opening opening notification command is received. The processing includes setting for performing an effect performed when the ball device 7 is in the open state (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening), and the like. In the big hit start process, when the large winning opening opening notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. The process during the round is a process of determining whether or not a notification command after opening the special winning opening is received, and a process during closing when the notification command after opening the special winning opening is received. The processing includes setting for performing an effect performed when the ball device 7 is in the closed state (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during closing). In the processing during the round, when the notification command after opening the special winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-round processing of step S176 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. The post-round processing is a process of determining whether or not a special winning opening opening notification command and a hit end designation command have been received, and a processing during opening as a process executed when a special winning opening opening notification command is received. (For example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to an opening effect) or a setting for performing an ending effect as a process to be executed when a hit end designation command is received (for example, an ending effect). (Eg, setting of the corresponding effect control pattern and the value of the ending effect execution time timer). In the post-round processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" when the special winning opening notification command is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" when the hit end designation command is received. I do.

  The post-big hit end processing in step S177 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. The post-big hit end processing determines whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the post-round processing (step S176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after the start of the ending effect execution on the image display device 5 has reached the set time). No) or processing to set the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the high-accuracy high base state as a processing to be executed when the ending effect execution time timer times out (provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191). (The process of setting the high-accuracy flag and the high-base flag to the ON state) and the process of setting the number of times of ST and the number of time savings. In the post-big hit end processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning effect determination processing (S150). In the prize-winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the contents stored in the start prize reception command buffer (the first start prize reception command buffer 194A or the second start prize reception command buffer 194B). Is checked (step S151), and it is determined whether the first start-up opening winning designation command is received as a new reception command (step S152). If it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S152; NO), the effect control CPU 120 checks the contents stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B ( Step S153), it is determined whether or not the second start-up opening winning designation command has been received as a new reception command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start-up opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; NO), the winning effect determination processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the first starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, a high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving state (highly accurate high base state) is set (step S152). When it is determined that it is not the time saving state (step S155: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect determination process such as holding (step S160A). The processing for determining an effect such as holding in step S160A includes a process of determining the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL (specifically, the processing for holding such an effect in the first start winning storage display area 5HL). The process includes a process of determining whether or not to perform the process, and a process of determining an effect pattern such as suspension when the process is determined to be performed. Details will be described later.

  After executing the effect determination processing such as suspension (step S160A), effect control CPU 120 stores the determined content of the effect determination processing such as suspension (step S160B). Specifically, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the effect such as the hold in the effect determination process in step S160A, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect pattern in hold determined in the effect determination process in step S160A. The information indicating the display mode (that is, the display mode at the time of addition and after each shift specified by the hold or other effect pattern) corresponds to the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. It is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the effect such as the hold in the effect determination process of the hold etc. in step S160A, the normal display mode (for example, white ) Is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A.

  After executing the processing of step S160B, effect control CPU 120 executes a chance zone effect determination process (step S161A), and stores the determined content of the chance zone effect (step S161B). The details of the chance zone effect determination processing will be described later.

  After executing the processing of step S161B, effect control CPU 120 adds a first hold display based on the determination content stored in step S160B (step S162). Specifically, effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control for adding the first hold display to first start winning storage display area 5HL in the sixth layer (Z value = 5) from the top. More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display in the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. The effect control pattern to be displayed is set as a use pattern, and a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. 27 (A), (B), and (A) of FIG. 29 to which the first hold display is added. Then, the prize-winning effect determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, a high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high-accuracy high-base state) (step S156). When it is determined that the time saving state (high-accuracy high base state) is set (step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect determination process such as holding (step S163A). The processing for determining an effect such as holding in step S163A is the same as the processing for determining an effect such as holding in step S160A. In other words, in the effect determination processing such as holding in step S163A, the processing of determining the display mode of the second holding display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR (specifically, the holding in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, etc.). (A process of determining whether or not an effect is to be executed, and a process of determining an effect pattern such as suspension when it is determined that the effect is to be executed).

  After executing the effect determination processing such as holding (step S163A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of step S163B, step S164A, step S164B, and step S165, and ends the winning effect determination processing. In addition, each processing of step S163B, step S164A, step S164B, and step S165 related to the second starting opening winning is the same as each processing of step S160B, step S161A, step S161B, and step S162 related to the first starting opening winning. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  When it is determined in step S155 that the vehicle is in the time saving state (step S155: YES), or when it is determined in step S156 that the vehicle is not in the time saving state (step S156: NO), the hold addition processing corresponding to the designation of the start opening winning is executed. (S166). Specifically, when the first starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S152: YES, step S155: YES), effect control CPU 120 executes the effect such as holding in the effect determination process such as holding in step S160A. As in the case where it is determined not to be performed, information indicating a normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as a display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, and the first hold display displayed in the normal display mode is first started. It is added to the winning storage display area 5HL. Then, the prize-winning effect determination process ends. On the other hand, when the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S154: YES, step S156: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the effect such as holding in the effect determining process such as holding in step S163A. Similarly to the case where the information is displayed, information indicating a normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as a display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, and a second hold display displayed in the normal display mode is displayed as a second start winning storage display. Add to area 5HR. Then, the prize-winning effect determination process ends.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect determination processing such as suspension (steps S160A and S163A). FIG. 34 (A) is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect determination processing such as suspension. In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 34A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a plurality of types of effect execution determination tables (such as non-specific pattern (losing) hold etc.) stored in the ROM 121 are stored. Effect execution presence / absence determination table, effect such as hold for specific pattern (losing), effect execution presence / absence determination table for non-specific pattern (big hit), effect such as hold for specific pattern (big hit) Table), select an effect execution presence / absence determination table according to the fluctuation category command (non-specific pattern (losing), specific pattern (losing), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)) And set (step S9000).

  FIG. 34B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not an effect such as suspension is performed. According to the example shown in FIG. 34 (B), execution / non-execution of an effect such as suspension is determined based on the variable category command. That is, when the pattern is a non-specific pattern (loss), no execution is determined at a rate of 90%, and execution is determined at a rate of 10%. When the pattern is a specific pattern (losing), no execution is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution is determined at a rate of 30%. When the pattern is a non-specific pattern (big hit), no execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution is determined at a rate of 40%. When the pattern is a specific pattern (big hit), no execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution is determined at a rate of 80%.

  The respective non-execution and non-execution determination tables determine whether “no execution” and “execution” are determined at the ratios shown in FIG. 34 (B). Each of them is assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as holding. For example, in the non-specific pattern (losing) effect such as holding effect determination table, “No execution” is determined at a rate of 90%, and “Execution” is determined at a rate of 10%. A numerical value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as a hold is assigned to each of “No execution” and “Execution”. In the effect execution presence / absence determination table for a specific pattern (losing), “No execution” is determined such that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 70% and “Execution” is determined at a rate of 30%. And “executed” are assigned numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as holding. In the non-specific pattern (big hit) rendering etc. effect execution presence / absence determination table, “No execution” is determined such that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 60%, and “Execution” is determined at a rate of 40%. ”And“ executed ”are assigned numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining whether to perform an effect such as holding. In the effect execution presence / absence determination table for a specific pattern (big hit), “No execution” is determined such that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 20% and “Execution” is determined at a rate of 80%. And “executed” are assigned numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as holding. Note that the random number value for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as holding may be updated, for example, in an effect random number update process (step S77).

  Subsequent to the process of step S9000, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an effect such as a hold based on a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as a hold (step S9001). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as a hold, and a determination value of “no execution” or “execute” in the hold or the like effect execution determination table set in step S9000. To determine whether or not to perform an effect such as suspension.

  Subsequent to the process of step S9001, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute an effect such as holding (step S9002). If it is determined that the effect such as holding is to be executed (step S9002; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of stored memories (prize is held) from the plurality of types of holding etc. effect pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 121. An effect pattern determination table is selected and set according to the number of the item) and the variation category command (step S9003). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the winning is the first hold (first hold in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or first hold in the second start winning storage display area 5HR). An effect pattern determination table for the first hold, such as a hold, is set, and the winning is the second hold (the second hold in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, or the second hold in the second start winning storage display area 5HR). In the case of the second prize, an effect pattern determination table for the second prize or the like is set, and the prize is the third prize (the third prize in the first start prize storage display area 5HL or the second prize). In the case of the prize storage display area 5HR, if it is the third prize storage display area 5HR, an effect pattern determination table for the third prize is set, and the fourth prize is retained (first start prize storage display area). Hold 4 th in A 5HL, or sets a hold like effect pattern determination table for holding a fourth point when a hold 4 th) in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.

  Subsequent to the process of step S9003, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern such as the hold based on the random number value for determining the effect pattern such as the hold (step S9004). That is, the effect control CPU 120 compares numerical data indicating a random value for determining an effect pattern such as a hold with the determination value of each effect pattern such as a hold in the effect pattern determination table set in step S9003. To determine an effect pattern such as one hold. Then, the effect determination processing such as suspension is ended. Note that the random number value for determining an effect pattern such as a hold may be updated, for example, in an effect random number update process (step S77).

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to perform the effect such as the hold (step S9002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode after addition of the hold display and after each shift, and the display mode of the active display to white ( Normal display mode) is determined (step S9005). Then, the effect determination processing such as suspension is ended.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect pattern and the like on hold. FIG. 35 (A) shows a hold etc. effect pattern (one example) determined by a hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold. That is, if it is determined in the hold etc. effect determination process to be executed when the winning is the third hold, that the hold etc. effect is to be executed (step S9002; YES), the plurality of hold shown in FIG. One of the attraction effect patterns is determined from the attraction effect patterns (retention and other effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14”).

  In FIG. 35 (A), “display mode of hold display at third hold position” in the figure is a display mode of hold display at a position after additional display to before the first shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position three seconds before the first start winning storage display area 5HL, or the second hold at the position three seconds before the second start winning storage display area 5HR. It is a display mode of a display. The “display mode of the hold display at the second hold position” in the drawing is the display mode of the hold display at the positions after the first shift to before the second shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position two seconds before the first start winning storage display area 5HL is used, or the second hold at the position two seconds before the second start winning storage display area 5HR is used. It is a display mode of a display. The “display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” in the drawing is the display mode of the hold display at the positions after the second shift to before the third shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position immediately preceding the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second hold at the position immediately preceding the second start winning storage display area 5HR. It is a display mode of a display.

  In FIG. 35 (A), for example, the effect pattern “HP1” such as hold displays white as the hold display at the third hold position, displays white as the hold display at the second hold position, and holds 1 This is an effect pattern such as a hold display in which white is displayed as the hold display at the position of the individual and yellow is displayed as the active display. The effect pattern “HP2” such as the hold is displayed as white as the hold display at the third hold position, white as the hold display at the second hold position, and yellow as the hold display at the first hold position. Is displayed and yellow is displayed as an active display. The effect pattern “HP3”, such as a hold, displays white as the hold display of the third hold position, displays yellow as the hold display of the second hold position, and displays yellow as the hold display of the first hold position. Is displayed and yellow is displayed as an active display. The effect patterns such as “HP4” to “HP14”, such as the holding effect, are also as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 35 (A) shows the hold etc. effect pattern determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold. However, FIG. 35 (A) shows the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold. An effect pattern determined such as a hold effect pattern determined, an effect pattern such as a hold determined for the second hold effect pattern determination table, and an effect such as a hold determined for the fourth hold effect pattern determination table The same applies to patterns.

  For example, the hold etc. effect patterns determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold are “display mode of the hold display at the position of the first hold” and “display mode of the hold display of the active display”. May be set as long as is set. The hold etc. effect pattern determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the second hold is “display mode of the hold display at the position of the second hold” and “display mode of the hold display at the position of the first hold”. ”And“ display form of active display hold display ”may be set. The hold etc. effect patterns determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the fourth hold are “display mode of the hold display at the fourth hold position” and “display mode of the hold display at the third hold position”. "," Display mode of hold display at second position of hold "," display mode of hold display at first position of hold ", and" display mode of hold display of active display " I just need.

  FIG. 35 (B) is an example of a determination ratio of a hold and other effect pattern by the hold and other effect pattern determination table for the third hold. According to the example shown in FIG. 35 (B), effects such as holding are performed in accordance with the fluctuation category command (non-specific pattern (losing), specific pattern (losing), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)). The pattern determination ratio is different. In addition, in the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold, one of the hold etc. effect patterns from among the hold etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” is determined according to the fluctuation category command as shown in FIG. ), Each of the effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” such as the holding effect pattern is compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect pattern such as the holding effect according to the fluctuation category command. It is only necessary that a numerical value (judgment value) to be assigned is assigned.

  For example, in a table to be referred to when a specific pattern (losing) is performed, each of the holding etc. effect patterns "HP1" to "HP4" is determined at a rate of 23%, and the holding etc. effect patterns "HP5" to "HP12". It is sufficient that a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining an effect pattern such as a hold is assigned to each effect pattern such as a hold so that each is determined at a rate of 1%. . In addition, in the table to be referred to when the pattern is a non-specific pattern (big hit), each of the holding effect patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the holding etc. effect patterns “HP5” to “HP14” Is determined at a rate of 2% so that a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining an effect pattern for holding or the like is assigned to each effect pattern for holding or the like. Good.

  In addition, the determination ratio of the effect pattern such as the hold by the hold effect pattern determination table for the first hold, the determination ratio of the effect pattern such as the hold by the effect pattern determination table for the second hold, the fourth ratio of the hold, etc. Although the determination ratio of the effect pattern for holding etc. by the effect / holding effect pattern determination table is omitted, the case of the first holding and the case of the third holding are both the fourth holding and the third holding. As in the case of, any of the effect patterns such as holding may be determined.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the chance zone effect determination processing (steps S161A and S164A). FIG. 36A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance zone effect determination process. In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 36A, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning is the third or fourth winning (step S9010). If it is determined that the winning is not the third or fourth (step S9010; NO), that is, if the winning is the first or second, the chance zone effect determination processing ends.

  If it is determined that the winning is the third or fourth (step S9010; YES), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a chance zone effect period (a period during which a chance zone effect is being executed). (Step S9011). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect has already been set as the use pattern, and if the effect control pattern has already been set as the use pattern, the set contents (execution timing, etc.). ) And the value of the effect control process timer, it may be determined whether or not it is a chance zone effect period. If it is determined that it is the chance zone effect period (step S9011; YES), the chance zone effect determination processing ends.

  If it is determined that it is not the chance zone effect period (step S9011; NO), the effect control CPU 120 has determined that the chance zone effect execution has been performed (a state where the execution of the chance zone effect has been determined but has not yet been executed). ) Is determined (step S9012). For example, the effect control CPU 120 associates any one of the buffer numbers of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D) with information (described later) indicating that the target is a chance zone effect target. It may be determined whether or not the chance zone effect execution has been determined based on whether or not it has already been stored. If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution has been determined (step S9012; YES), the chance zone effect determination process ends.

  If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution has not been determined (step S9012; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the plurality of types of chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination tables (non-specific pattern (losing) chances) stored in the ROM 121. Zone effect execution presence / absence determination table, chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for specific pattern (losing), chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for non-specific pattern (big hit), chance zone effect execution presence / absence for specific pattern (big hit) A determination table according to the variation category command (non-specific pattern (losing), specific pattern (losing), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)). Select and set (Step S 013).

  FIG. 36 (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a chance zone effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 36 (B), whether or not to execute the chance zone effect is determined based on the fluctuation category command. That is, when the pattern is a non-specific pattern (losing), no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When it is a specific pattern (loss), no execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution is determined at a rate of 5%. When it is a non-specific pattern (big hit), no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When it is a specific pattern (big hit), no execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  In each of the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination tables, “no execution” and “execution performed” are determined so that “no execution” and “execution performed” are determined at the ratios shown in FIG. Each is assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a chance zone effect. For example, in the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for the non-specific pattern (losing), chances are given for each of “no execution” and “executed” so that “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute a zone effect is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for the specific pattern (losing), “No execution” is determined such that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 95% and “Yes” is determined at a rate of 5%. And “executed” are assigned numerical values to be compared with random number values for determining whether or not to execute a chance zone effect. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for the non-specific pattern (big hit), a chance zone effect is provided for each of “no execution” and “executed” so that “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value to be compared with the random number for execution determination is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for a specific pattern (big hit), “no execution” is determined such that “no execution” is determined at a rate of 80% and “executed” is determined at a rate of 20%. And “executed” are assigned numerical values to be compared with random number values for determining whether or not to execute a chance zone effect. The random number value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect may be updated, for example, in an effect random number update process (step S77).

  Subsequent to the process of step S9013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the chance zone effect based on the random number value for determining whether to execute the chance zone effect (step S9014). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the numerical data indicating the random number value for the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination and the determination value of “no execution” or “execution existence” in the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table set in step S9013. To determine whether or not to execute the chance zone effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the chance zone effect is to be executed, the first start winning command buffer 194A (or the second start winning command buffer 194B) storing the hold information of the current winning is stored. Information indicating that the target is a chance zone effect target is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D) corresponding to the number. Then, the chance zone effect determination processing ends.

  In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 36, when the winning is not the third or fourth (step S9010; NO), the chance zone effect is not executed, but the winning is the third or fourth. The chance zone effect may be executed even when it is not the eye. For example, when the first prize is won, the chance zone effect may be started from the next change of the target. If there is no winning during the change of the target, the chance zone effect may be ended at the end of the change of the target. Also, if a prize is awarded while the target is being changed, a chance is provided unconditionally (or only when the jackpot expectation of the change corresponding to the prize is high) until the end of the change corresponding to the prize. The zone effect may be continued, or the chance zone effect may be ended at the end of the target change as in the case where no prize has been won during the change of the target.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not “losing” has occurred, for example, by reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11. Is determined (step S522). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a first variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “losing”. If there is, it is determined that "losing". On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 is the second variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result will be a 16R probability big hit, or the variable display result notification command. If the result is a third variable display result notification command for notifying that the result is an 8R probability change jackpot, it is determined that the command is not “losing”.

  If it is determined in step S522 that it is “losing” (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 reads the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, to thereby specify the specified fluctuation. The pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, and “PA2-2” in FIG. 5) corresponding to a case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach (loss)”. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; YES), effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that form a non-reach combination (step S524). ). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left decided symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left determined symbol determination table or the like, the left determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a right determined symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. And the like, the right determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. And the like, among the determined decorative symbols, the middle determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination serving as a predetermined chance symbol may be determined in response to the case where the variable symbol preview is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S523; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that constitute the reach combination (step S525). . As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining left and right fixed symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. For example, by referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, the fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5. To determine a decorative symbol having the same symbol number. Further, it extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and reads a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the determined decorative design, the middle fixed decorative design that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  In the case where the fixed decorative symbol is a big hit combination, for example, when the symbol number of the middle fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value ( For example, by adding or subtracting “1”) to or from the symbol number of the middle fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a big hit combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decoration symbol, the difference (symbol difference) between the left fixed decoration symbol and the right fixed decoration symbol with the symbol number may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  If it is determined in step S522 that it is not "losing" (step S522; NO), that is, if it is "big hit (16R certain-variable big hit, 8R certain-variable big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 sets the fixed decoration that constitutes the big hit combination A combination of symbols (final stop symbols) is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big hit fixed symbol determination table, the display is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined.

  Note that when determining the combination of the fixed decoration symbols in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines the fixed decoration according to the type of the big hit (16R certain change big hit, 8R certain change big hit), the presence or absence of the promotion effect, and the like. The design may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a jackpot combination dedicated to 16R probable jackpot (for example, three odd odd identical jackpots arranged side by side) and a jackpot combination dedicated to 8R probable jackpot (for example, even In a mode where three jackpots are arranged, in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot, either the jackpot combination dedicated to the 16R variable jackpot or the jackpot combination dedicated to the 8R variable jackpot may be determined as the fixed decorative symbol. . At this time, if the jackpot combination dedicated to the 8R probability variable jackpot is determined as the final decorative symbol, the promotion effect may be informed that the 16R probability variable jackpot is reached before the end of the 8th round. On the other hand, in the case of the 8R probability variable jackpot, it is only necessary to determine whether the combination is a jackpot combination dedicated to the 8R probability variable jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R probable big hit (probability) is not provided. However, when the 2R probable big hit (probability) is provided, the combination of the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the 2R probable big hit (probability) is used. You may decide.

  After executing any of the processes of step S524, step S525, and step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change is a chance zone change (step S529A). . For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores information indicating that the target is a chance zone effect target in association with any buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D). It may be determined whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone based on whether or not the change is made.

  If it is determined in step S529A that the change is a chance zone change (step S529A; YES), effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect as a use pattern (step S529B). . That is, when it is determined that the chance zone effect is to be executed in the chance zone effect determination process (FIG. 36) executed at the time of winning and information indicating that the target is a target is stored (step S9014), the process is executed first thereafter. In the variable display start setting process, an effect control pattern corresponding to a chance zone effect is set as a use pattern. Thus, when the chance zone effect is executed at the time of winning, the chance zone effect starts from the next change (the change started first after the winning).

  If it is determined in step S529A that the change is not a change in the chance zone (step S529A; NO), or after executing the process of step S529B, the effect control CPU 120 executes a step-up notice effect determining process (step S529A). S530A). In the step-up notice effect deciding process, it is determined whether or not the step-up notice effect (one mode of the main notice effect) is to be executed, and if it is determined that the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the step-up notice effect pattern is determined.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio and the like of whether or not to execute the main announcement effect (step-up announcement effect, group announcement effect, and the like). FIG. 38A is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect. In FIG. 38A (the same applies to FIGS. 38B and C), the variation pattern “PA2-X” represents the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-2”, and the variation pattern “PA3-X”. Represents the variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”, the variation pattern “PA4-X” represents the variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3”, and the variation pattern “PA5-X”. ] Represents the variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”, the variation pattern “PB3-X” represents the variation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”, and the variation pattern “PB4-X”. Indicates the fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3”, and the fluctuation pattern “PB5-X” indicates the fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3”.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 38A, whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. That is, when the variation pattern is “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “PA2-X”, no execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the variation pattern is “PA3-X”, when the variation pattern is “PB3-X”, when the variation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, or when the variation pattern is “PB4-X” The case of “PB5-X” is also the same as that shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”) is used. X "," PB3-X "," PA4-X "or" PA5-X "," PB4-X "or" PB5-X "). It is stored in the ROM 121.

  In each of the above-described step-up announcement effect execution presence / absence determination tables, “no execution” and “execution existence” are respectively determined as “no execution” and “execution existence” at the ratio shown in FIG. ”May be assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect. For example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “No execution” and “No execution” are determined so that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. It is only necessary that a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect is assigned to each of “executed”. Further, for example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA2-X”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “execution” is determined at a rate of 5%. A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect may be assigned to each of “no execution” and “executed”. The random number value for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect may be updated, for example, in an effect random number update process (step S77).

  FIG. 38B is an example of the determination ratio of the step-up notice effect pattern. In FIG. 38B, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU1). The step-up notice effect (SU1) is an effect of displaying a frame image G11 (FIG. 29D) as a first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU2). The step-up notice effect (SU2) is an effect of displaying the frame image G12 (FIG. 29D) as a second step following the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-3 (SU3)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU3). The step-up notice effect (SU3) is an effect of displaying a frame image G13 (FIG. 29D) as a third step following the first step and the second step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-4 (SU4)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU4). The step-up notice effect (SU4) is an effect of displaying the frame image G14 (FIG. 29D) as a fourth step following the first, second, and third steps in the display area of the image display device 5. is there. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-5 (SU5)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU5). In the step-up notice effect (SU5), the frame image G15 (FIG. 29D) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a fifth step following the first, second, third, and fourth steps. This is an effect to be displayed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 38B, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”, “PB3-X”, “PA4-X”, or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X” Or "PB5-X"), the step-up notice effect pattern is determined. That is, when the variation pattern is “PA2-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is determined. It is determined at a rate of 15%. When the variation pattern is “PA3-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is 30%. , The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-3 (SU3)” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-4 (SU4)” is determined at a rate of 10%. .

  FIG. 38B also shows the variation pattern “PB3-X”, the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, and the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”. The description is omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (B), when determining the step-up notice effect pattern, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”) , "PB3-X", "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", "PB4-X" or "PB5-X") stored in the ROM 121. I do.

  In each of the above-described step-up notice effect pattern determination tables, the step-up notice effect patterns are respectively added to the step-up notice effect patterns so that each of the step-up notice effect patterns is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. It is only necessary that a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number for pattern determination (not shown) is assigned. For example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the variation pattern “PA2-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1” is determined. -2 (SU2) ”is determined at a rate of 15%, for each of the step-up notice effect patterns, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the step-up notice effect pattern. Should just be assigned. For example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the variation pattern “PA3-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “ "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is determined at a rate of 30%, the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-3 (SU3)" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-4 (SU4)". Is determined at a rate of 10%, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining a step-up notice effect pattern is assigned to each of the step-up notice effect patterns. Just fine. The random value for determining the step-up announcement effect pattern may be updated, for example, in an effect random number update process (step S77).

  That is, in the step-up notice effect deciding process (step S530A) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first responds to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. The step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table is set (selected), and numerical data indicating a random value for determining the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence, and “No execution” or “Execute” in the set step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table For example, the presence / absence of execution of the step-up notice effect is determined by comparing with a determination value of “Yes”. Then, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 sets (selects) a step-up notice effect pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, and performs step-up. Numerical data indicating the random number value for the announcement effect pattern determination and each step-up announcement effect pattern determination value in the set step-up announcement effect pattern determination table, for example, to compare one step-up announcement effect pattern decide.

  After executing the step-up notice effect determination processing of step S530A, the group notice effect determination processing is executed (step S530B). In the group announcement effect determination process, the presence or absence of execution of the group announcement effect (one mode of the main announcement effect) is determined.

  FIG. 38 (C) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a group announcement effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 38 (C), the execution / non-execution of the group announcement effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the variation pattern is “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, when the variation pattern is “PA2-X”, when the variation pattern is “PA3-X”, or when the variation pattern is If “PB3-X”, no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, the non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution is determined at a rate of 5%. When the variation pattern is “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”, no execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (C), when determining whether or not to execute the group announcement effect, for example, the variation pattern (the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”) is used. , "PB3-X", "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", "PB4-X" or "PB5-X") in the ROM 121. Remember.

  In the above-mentioned group announcement effect execution presence / absence determination tables, “no execution” and “execution yes” are respectively determined as “no execution” and “execution yes” at the ratios shown in FIG. May be assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform the group announcement effect. For example, in the group announcement effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “no execution” and “execution” are determined so that “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. It is only necessary that a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform the group announcement effect is assigned to each of “Yes”. Further, for example, in the group announcement effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “execution is performed” at a rate of 5%. , A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not a group announcement effect is to be executed may be assigned to each of “no execution” and “with execution”. . The random number value for determining whether or not to perform the group announcement effect may be updated, for example, in an effect random number update process (step S77).

  That is, in the group announcement effect determination process (step S530B) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 firstly sets the group corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Set (select) the notice effect execution presence / absence determination table, set the numerical data indicating the random number value for the group notice effect execution presence / absence determination, and determine whether or not "executed" or "executed" in the set group notice effect effect execution determination table The presence or absence of the group announcement effect is determined by comparing the value with the value.

  After executing the group announcement effect deciding process of step S530B, effect controlling CPU 120 executes a suspension digestion process (step S531). Specifically, effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control for shifting the hold display in the sixth layer (Z value = 5) from the top. More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the decoration symbol in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the current decoration symbol is linked with the first special figure game, ), The hold display and the active display after the shift based on the hold etc. effect pattern (that is, the contents stored in step S160B) determined in the hold etc. effect determination process (step S160A) of the winning effect determination process (step S150). Setting the effect control pattern corresponding to the display mode as a use pattern, and transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The display mode of the hold display and the active display after the shift determined in the effect determination processing such as the hold Corresponding hold such as a display image (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 29 (A)) to display a. Note that the same applies to the case where the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game (when the variable display of the current decorative symbol is linked to the second special figure game).

  After executing the suspension digestion processing of step S531, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation as a use pattern (step S532). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the use pattern. Thus, for example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the super reach β, the effect control pattern including the movable auditors control data for operating the movable auditors 17 is set as the use pattern. . If it is determined in the step-up notice effect determination processing (step S530A) that the step-up notice effect is to be executed, an effect control pattern corresponding to the determined step-up notice effect pattern is set as a use pattern. If it is determined in the group announcement effect determination process (step S530B) that the group announcement effect is to be executed, an effect control pattern corresponding to the group announcement effect is set as a use pattern.

  After executing the process of step S532, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer. Then (step S535), the control of the rendering device such as the image display device 5 is performed according to the contents of the process data (step S536).

  Subsequently, effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation time timer (step S537).

  After executing the processing of step S537, effect control CPU 120 digests the command stored in first start winning reception command buffer 194A or second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, when the variable display of the decoration symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the effect control CPU 120 is the smallest command among the commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number "1") is deleted, and the first start winning reception command buffer 194A is set to a buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted. Each command stored in the corresponding area is shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the effect control CPU 120 sets the smallest buffer number among the commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B ( The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1") is deleted, and the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. Are shifted while maintaining the winning order. In the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the information stored in the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C or the second look-ahead notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command. Deletes and shifts are also performed. In the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores a command to be deleted (a design command for the change, a change category command, and the like) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  Subsequent to the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S539), and ends the variable display start setting process. .

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect processing (step S172). FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a chance zone effect operation control process and the like. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a group announcement effect operation control process and the like. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect execution notification operation control process.

  In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the variable time timer value (step S540), and determines whether the variable time timer value has become 0 (step S541). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable time timer has timed out. When the fluctuation time timer value becomes 0 (step S541; YES), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (step S548). ), End the variable display effect processing.

  When the variation time timer value is not 0 (step S541; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control such as variable display of decorative symbols on the tenth layer from the top (Z value = 9) ( Start and continue) (step S542). Specifically, effect control CPU 120 issues a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). By transmitting the image to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, an image including a decorative pattern or the like corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is displayed.

  After executing the process of step S542, a chance zone effect operation control process is executed (step S543).

  FIG. 40A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance zone effect operation control process (step S543). In the chance zone effect operation control process shown in FIG. 40A, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the change is a change in the chance zone (step S9020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores information indicating that the target is a chance zone effect target in association with any buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D). It may be determined whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone based on whether or not the change is made. When it is determined that the change is not a change in the chance zone (step S9020; NO), the chance zone effect operation control process ends.

  If it is determined that the change is a chance zone change (step S9020; YES), effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the chance zone effect on the eighth layer from the top (Z value = 7) ( Start and continue) (step S9021). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 to display a chance zone effect image (see FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 29C) corresponding to the chance zone effect. .

  In the chance zone effect determination process (see FIG. 36A), when it is determined that a chance zone effect is to be executed in the determination of whether or not the chance zone effect is to be executed (step S9014), the number of retained memories (the number of winning prizes held) is determined. (For example, the count value “1” for the first hold, the count value “2” for the second hold, for example, the count value “2”, the hold 3) For example, the count value is set to “3” when the number is the first, and the count value is set to “4” when the number is the fourth. The chance zone continuation counter may be provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193.

  As described above, when using the chance zone continuation counter, in the process of step S9020, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone based on the value of the chance zone continuation counter. May be.

  After executing the chance zone effect operation control process of step S543, a step-up notice effect operation control process is executed (step S544).

  FIG. 40B is a flowchart illustrating an example of the step-up notice effect operation control process (Step S544). In the step-up notice effect operation control process shown in FIG. 40B, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a step-up notice effect period (a period during which the step-up notice effect is executed) is performed (step S9030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect effect pattern has already been set as the use pattern, and if the effect control pattern has already been set as the use pattern, the set contents (execute The timing may be determined based on the timing and the value of the effect control process timer. When it is determined that it is not the step-up notice effect period (step S9030; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process ends.

  If it is determined that it is the step-up notice effect period (step S9030; YES), effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the step-up notice effect in the ninth layer (Z value = 8) from the top (start). , Continuation) (step S9031). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). By transmitting a control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, a step-up notice effect image corresponding to the step-up notice effect (SU1 to SU5) (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 29 (D)) is displayed.

  After executing the processing of step S9031, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the SU5 execution flag indicating that the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed is in an on state (step S9032). The SU5 execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the SU5 execution flag is on (step S9032; YES), the step-up notice effect operation control process ends.

  If the SU5 execution flag is not on (step S9032; NO), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed (step S9033). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171), or if the effect control pattern is set as a use pattern. May determine whether or not the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed based on the set contents (such as the execution timing of SU5) and the value of the effect control process timer. If the step-up notice effect (SU5) has not been executed (step S9033; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process ends. If the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed (step S9033; YES), the SU5 execution flag is set to the ON state (step S9034), and the step-up notice effect operation control process ends.

  After executing the step-up notice effect operation control processing of step S544, a group notice effect operation control processing is executed (step S545).

  FIG. 41A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the group announcement effect operation control process (step S545). In the group announcement effect operation control process shown in FIG. 41A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a group announcement effect period (a period during which a group announcement effect is executed) (step S9040). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the group announcement effect has been set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171), or sets if the effect control pattern has been set as a use pattern. It may be determined whether or not the current period is the group announcement effect period based on the contents (eg, the execution timing of the group announcement effect) and the value of the effect control process timer. When it is determined that it is not the group announcement effect period (step S9040; NO), the group announcement effect operation control process ends.

  If it is determined that it is the group announcement effect period (step S9040; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the group announcement effect on the seventh layer (Z value = 6) from the top (start, continuation). ) (Step S9041). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the group announcement effect set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 to display a group announcement effect image (see FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 29B) corresponding to the group announcement effect. .

  After executing the processing of step S9041, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a group announcement effect execution flag indicating that the group announcement effect has been executed is on (step S9042). Note that the group announcement effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. When the group announcement effect execution flag is on (step S9042; YES), the group announcement effect operation control process ends.

  If the group announcement effect flag is not on (step S9042; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the group announcement effect flag to on (step S9043), and ends the group announcement effect operation control process.

  After executing the group announcement effect operation control process in step S545, the accessory operation control process is executed (step S546).

  FIG. 41B is a flowchart illustrating an example of the accessory operation control process (Step S546). In the accessory operation control process shown in FIG. 41 (B), first, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is an accessory operation period (a period during which movable movable object 17 is operated) (step S9050). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (the variation pattern of the super reach β) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory 17 is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171). No, and if it is set as a usage pattern, whether or not it is a group announcement effect period is determined based on the set contents (operation timing of the movable accessory 17 and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer. It may be determined. If it is determined that it is not the accessory operation period (step S9050; NO), the accessory operation control process ends.

  When it is determined that it is the accessory operation period (step S9050; YES), effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of movable accessory 17 (step S9051). Specifically, effect control CPU 120 determines whether the movable role included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). The movable command 17 is operated by, for example, transmitting a control command specified by the item control data to the command control board 16.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9051, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts and continues) the operation control of the character effect effect in the fifth layer (Z value = 4) from the top (step S9052). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern (the effect effect effect) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β) set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). (Including display control data to be executed), a display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, etc., so that the special effect effect image corresponding to the special effect effect is generated. (See FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 28C).

  After executing the processing of step S9052, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character effect effect execution flag indicating that the operation control of the accessory is to be performed is on (step S9053). Note that the character effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the accessory effect execution flag is on (step S9053; YES), the accessory operation control process ends.

  If the accessory effect execution flag is not on (step S9053; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accessory effect execution flag to on (step S9054), and ends the accessory operation control process.

  After executing the accessory operation control process of step S546, the CPU executes the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547). In the effect execution notification operation control process shown in FIG. 42, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) is present (step S9060). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to determine whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) is already set as the use pattern, or set if the effect control pattern is already set as the use pattern. It may be determined whether or not the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) is based on the content (notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) (step S9060; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the SU5 execution flag indicating that the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed. It is determined whether or not is turned on (step S9061). If the SU5 execution flag is on (step S9061; YES), effect control CPU 120 clears the SU5 execution flag to off (step S9062).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of SU5 (step S9060; YES), or after executing the processing of step S9062, the effect control CPU 120 determines the layer according to the notification number and the notification start order (Z value = In steps 1 to 3, the operation control of the execution notification of the SU5 is executed (started and continued) (step S9063). Specifically, effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 as a use pattern, and displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. An effect execution notification image (FIGS. 27A, 27B, 28B, and 28D) corresponding to the SU5 execution notification by, for example, transmitting to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123. , FIG. 28 (E) and FIG. 28 (F)).

  When the SU5 execution flag is not in the ON state (step S9061; NO) or after executing the processing of step S9063, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the group announcement effect (step S9061). Step S9064). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the group announcement effect has already been set as the use pattern, and if the effect control pattern has already been set as the use pattern, the set contents ( It may be determined based on the timing of the notification, etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the group announcement effect.

  If it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution of the group announcement effect (step S9064; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group announcement effect execution flag indicating that the group announcement effect has been executed is on. Is determined (step S9065). If the group announcement effect flag is on (step S9065; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the group announcement effect flag to off (step S9066).

  If it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of the group announcement effect (step S9064; YES), or after executing the process of step S9066, the effect control CPU 120 determines the layer (Z The operation control of the notification of the execution of the group announcement effect is executed (starting and continuing) with the value = 1 to 3) (step S9067). Specifically, effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the group announcement effect as a use pattern, and displays a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern. Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, thereby producing an effect execution notification image (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, FIG. 28 (D), FIG. 28 (E) and FIG. 28 (F)).

  When the group announcement effect execution flag is not in the ON state (step S9065; NO), or after executing the processing of step S9067, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect. (Step S9068). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the character effect has already been set as the use pattern, or if the effect control pattern has already been set as the use pattern, the set contents ( It is also possible to determine whether or not it is the notification period of the execution of the special effect production based on the timing of the notification and the value of the production control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the role effect (step S9068; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the role effect execution flag is on (step S9069). If the accessory effect execution flag is not on (step S9069; NO), the effect execution notification operation control process ends. If the character effect execution flag is on (step S9069; YES), effect control CPU 120 clears the character effect execution flag to off (step S9070).

  If it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of the character effect (step S9068; YES), or after executing the process of step S9070, the effect control CPU 120 determines the layer (Z The action control of the notification of the execution of the character effect is executed (started and continued) with the value = 1 to 3) (step S9071). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the character effect as a use pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, thereby producing an effect execution notification image (FIGS. 27 (A), 27 (B), 28 (B), and FIG. 28 (D), FIG. 28 (E) and FIG. 28 (F)). Then, the effect execution notification operation control process ends.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure waiting process (step S173). In the waiting process per special figure shown in FIG. 43, first, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S720). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has not been received (step S720; NO), the special figure waiting process ends.

  When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the determined decoration symbol (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723). When the confirmed decorative symbol is not the big hit symbol (step S723: NO), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S726). The waiting process per special map ends.

  If the confirmed decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723: YES), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received (step S730). When it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received (step S730; NO), the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  If it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received (step S730; YES), effect control CPU 120 sets a fanfare effect (step S733), and sets the value of the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit start process. Is updated to “4” (step S734), and the waiting process per special figure ends.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. FIGS. 44A to 44E show display operations arranged in chronological order. In FIG. 44 (A) and the like, the arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 44 (A) shows the final stop symbol (left symbol “4”, middle symbol “1”, right symbol “6”) in the variable display corresponding to the hold indicator M0 (not shown) immediately before the hold indicator M1. Indicates a scene in which stop display is performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (A), an image of a decorative symbol including a final stop symbol (Z value = 9) and a first hold display image G5 (hold displays M1, M2, M3) Is displayed (Z value = 5).

  For the image of the decorative design, the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern or the like is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and the effect control pattern is set in the variable display effect process (see FIG. 39). Display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by the included display control data to the display control unit 123 or the like. The display image such as a hold is set as an effect control pattern corresponding to the display mode of the hold display or the active display as a use pattern in the winning effect determination processing (see FIG. 33) and the variable display start setting processing (see FIG. 37). The display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  It is assumed that the hold display M3 is additionally displayed based on the first start winning award generated during the variable display corresponding to the hold display M0 (not shown) (step S162 of the winning effect determination processing in FIG. 33). . Further, it is assumed that when the hold display M3 is additionally displayed, the execution of the chance zone effect targeting the hold display M3 is determined in the chance zone effect determination process (step S161A) (step in FIG. 36A). S9014).

  FIG. 44B shows a scene in which the variable display corresponding to the hold display M1 is being performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (B), an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9) and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) Display image (Z value = 5) including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10 (Z value = 7). I have.

  In the chance zone effect image, in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as a use pattern, and in the chance zone effect operation control process (see FIG. 40 (A)). The display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold display M1 is a fluctuation pattern accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 (a fluctuation pattern of the super reach β). It is also assumed that when the hold display M1 is exhausted, the execution of the step-up notice effect (SU4) and the execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37).

  FIG. 44C shows a scene following FIG. 44B. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44C, an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9) and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) Etc. display image (Z value = 5) including an active display image G7 (active display M1), a chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10, and a frame image G14. Is displayed (Z value = 8). In FIG. 44C, a character or the like is displayed as SU4 in the frame image G14, but is not shown. 44 (D) to 44 (E) are the same.

  In the step-up notice effect image, the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and the step-up notice effect operation control process (FIG. 40 (B) )), The display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123, and displayed.

  FIG. 44D shows a scene following FIG. 44C. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (D), an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9) and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) Etc. display image (Z value = 5) including an active display image G7 (active display M1), a chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10, and a frame image G14. Effect execution image including a step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8), a group notice effect image including the character image G8 (Z value = 6), and a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notice of the group notice effect A notification image (Z value = 3) is displayed.

  In the group announcement effect image, an effect control pattern corresponding to the group announcement effect is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and in the group announcement effect operation control process (see FIG. 41A). The display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern to the display control unit 123 or the like. In the effect execution notification image corresponding to the group notification effect execution notification, the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notification effect execution notification is set as the use pattern and the effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42). Display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the control pattern to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  FIG. 44E shows a scene following FIG. 44D. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44E, an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9) and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) Etc. display image (Z value = 5) including an active display image G7 (active display M1), a chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10, and a frame image G14. Effect execution image including a step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8), a group notice effect image including the character image G8 (Z value = 6), and a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notice of the group notice effect An effect execution notification image (Z value) including a notification image (Z value = 3), a character effect effect image (Z value = 4) including the effect image G4, and a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the notification of execution of the character effect. Value = 2) and It is displayed. In FIG. 44 (E), the movable role 17 that has moved (downward) is not shown. FIG. 45 (F) is the same.

  In the character effect effect image, in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) is set as a use pattern, and the accessory operation control process (FIG. 41 (B)), the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123, and the like is displayed. In the effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the character effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the character effect is set as the use pattern in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42), and the effect is set. Display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the control pattern to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an image with a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image with a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. FIGS. 45A to 44F show display operations arranged in chronological order. In FIG. 45 (A) and the like, an arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 45 (A) shows the final stop symbol (left symbol “2”, middle symbol “8”, right symbol “8”) in the variable display corresponding to the hold indicator M20 (not shown) immediately before the hold indicator M21. Indicates a scene in which stop display is performed. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (A) includes an image of a decorative symbol including the final stop symbol (Z value = 9) and a first hold display image G5 (hold displays M21 and M22). The display image (Z value = 5) is displayed.

  FIG. 45 (B) illustrates a scene in which the variable display corresponding to the hold display M21 is being performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45B, an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9), a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active A hold etc. display image (Z value = 5) including the display image G7 (active display M21) is displayed.

  It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold display M21 is a fluctuation pattern accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 (a fluctuation pattern of the super reach β). It is also assumed that, when the hold display M21 is exhausted, the execution of the step-up notice effect (SU5) and the execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37).

  FIG. 45C shows a scene following FIG. 45B. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (C), an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9), a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active Hold display image (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to SU5 execution notification An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1 is displayed. In FIG. 45C, a character or the like is displayed as SU5 in the frame image G15, but is not shown. 45 (D) to 45 (F) are the same. Further, in FIG. 45 (C), in the area other than the frame image G15, the decorative pattern being changed can be seen, but is not shown. 45 (D) to 45 (F) are the same.

  The effect execution notification image corresponding to the SU5 execution notification includes an effect control pattern corresponding to the SU5 execution notification set as a use pattern and included in the effect control pattern set in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42). The display is performed by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data to be displayed to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  FIG. 45D illustrates a scene following FIG. 45C. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45D, an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9), a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active Hold display image (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to SU5 execution notification An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1, a group announcement effect image including the character image G8 (Z value = 6), and a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the group announcement effect execution notification are included. An effect execution notification image (Z value = 2) is displayed.

  FIG. 45E shows a scene following FIG. 45D. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (E) includes an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9), a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active display. Hold display image (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to SU5 execution notification An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1, a group announcement effect image including a character image G8 (Z value = 6), and a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the group announcement effect execution notification are included. Effect execution notification image (Z value = 2), effect effect effect image (Z value = 4) including effect image G4, and effect execution notification image including pictogram image G3-3 corresponding to the notification of execution of the character effect (Z value = 1 Bets are displayed.

  FIG. 45 (F) shows a scene where a magnetic abnormality has occurred in the state of FIG. 45 (E). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45F, an error notification image (Z value = 0) including the pictogram image G1 and the character image G2 is displayed in addition to the screens of FIG. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an image with a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image with a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  In addition, effects other than the above-described effects can be executed. For example, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect related to the opening of the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined effect process for executing a predetermined effect related to the opening of the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B. The predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46 is executed, for example, before the winning effect effect determination process in the effect control process process (see FIG. 32). In FIG. 46, the predetermined effect related to the opening of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is simply referred to as a predetermined effect.

  In the predetermined effect processing shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a predetermined effect execution flag indicating that the predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). If the predetermined effect execution flag is set in step S731 (that is, if the predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the predetermined effect timer for measuring the effect period of the predetermined effect. Is decremented by 1 (step S734), and it is determined whether or not the value of the predetermined effect timer has become 0 (step S735A). If the value of the predetermined effect timer is not 0 (step S735A; NO), the operation control of the predetermined effect (see FIG. 48A described later) is executed (continued) (step S735B), and the predetermined effect process is performed. To end. When the value of the predetermined effect timer has become 0 (step S735A; YES), the predetermined effect is ended (step S736), the flag for executing the predetermined effect is reset (step S737), and the predetermined effect process ends.

  If the predetermined effect execution flag is not set in step S731 (step S731; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the normal symbol variation start designation command (normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command or ordinary symbol variation start). Is the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag (normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or ordinary symbol variation start designation (losing) command reception flag) indicating that the designated (loss) command has been received set? It is determined whether or not it is (step S751). If the normal symbol change start designation command reception flag is not set (step S751; NO), the predetermined effect processing is ended.

  If the normal symbol change start designation command reception flag is set (step S751; YES), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high base state based on the time reduction flag. (Step S752). If the current gaming state is the high base state (step S752; YES), the predetermined effect processing ends.

  When the current game state is not the high base state (step S752; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the big hit game state (step S753). Whether or not the game mode is the big hit game state may be determined based on, for example, a value of an effect process flag. For example, the production control CPU 120 may determine that the state is the big hit gaming state when the value of the production process flag is 4 or more. If it is in the big hit game state (step S753; YES), the predetermined effect processing ends.

  If it is not the big hit gaming state (step S753; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the decoration symbol is changing (step S755). Whether or not the decoration symbol is changing may be determined by, for example, the value of the effect process flag. If the decorative symbol is not changing (step S755; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one minute or more has elapsed since the change of the decorative symbol ended (step S757). For example, a timer for measuring the time after the change of the decorative symbol may be prepared, and whether or not one minute or more has elapsed may be determined based on the measured value of the timer. If one minute or more has elapsed (step S757; YES), the predetermined effect processing ends. If one minute or more has not elapsed (step S757; NO), the process proceeds to step S759.

  In addition, ending the process when one minute or more has elapsed since the end of the change of the decorative symbol considers that the player continues the game for a while after the end of the change of the decorative symbol. That's why. In addition, the above one minute is slightly longer than the time (12 seconds × 4) based on the fluctuation time (12 seconds) of the ordinary symbol in the low base state and the upper limit value 4 of the number of stored gates (the number of ordinary symbols held). This is because it is considered that it is better to execute the process of step S759 until the time (60 seconds) elapses.

  If the decorative symbol is changing (step S755; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, and determines the type (step S759).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination ratio of whether or not a predetermined effect is performed. In the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect at a ratio as shown in FIG. That is, in the predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table, determination values to be compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining the predetermined effect execution / non-execution etc. are assigned so as to have a ratio as shown in FIG.

  In the process of step S759, when the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs the predetermined effect execution (notification "x") and the predetermined effect execution existence (notification " 〇 ”), whether to perform a predetermined effect (notification“ × ”→“ 〇 ”), and to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, such that the ratio of the non-predetermined effect execution becomes the ratio of“ per normal symbol ”in FIG. The judgment values to be compared with the random numbers (not shown) are: predetermined effect execution (report “x”), predetermined effect execution (report “〇”), predetermined effect execution (report “x” → “〇”), By selecting a table assigned to each of the predetermined performance non-executions, and comparing a random number (not shown) for determining the presence or absence of the predetermined performance with a determination value, the predetermined performance execution presence (notification “×”), Predetermined production execution (report “〇”), predetermined production execution (report Knowledge “×” → “〇”), and whether or not the predetermined effect is not performed may be determined. When the normal symbol variation start designation (losing) command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs the predetermined effect execution (information “x”), performs the predetermined effect execution (information “〇”), The predetermined random number for determining whether or not the predetermined effect is to be executed is determined such that the ratio of the predetermined effect is present (notification “×” → “〇”) and the ratio of the non-predetermined effect is equal to the ratio of “normal design loss” in FIG. The determined values to be compared with the predetermined effects are the execution of the predetermined effect (notification “×”), the execution of the predetermined effect (information “〇”), the execution of the predetermined effect (information “×” → “〇”), and the absence of the predetermined effect. Are selected, and a random number (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform a predetermined effect is compared with a determination value, so that a predetermined effect is performed (notification “×”) and a predetermined effect is performed. (Information “〇”), execution of the predetermined effect (Information “×” → “〇”), place It may be determined either demonstration execution no. Note that the execution of the predetermined effect (notification “x”) is to execute the predetermined effect displaying “x”. Predetermined effect execution presence (notification “〇”) is to execute a predetermined effect displaying “〇”. The execution of the predetermined effect (notification “×” → “〇”) is to execute a predetermined effect of displaying “〇” after displaying “×”. No predetermined effect execution means that the predetermined effect is not executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the normal symbol change start designation command reception flag when executing the process of step S759. The effect control CPU 120 also resets the set normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag when not performing the process of step S759 due to the determination of “YES” in steps S752, S753, and S755.

  Subsequent to the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the predetermined effect by the process of step S759 (step S764). When it is not determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S764; NO), the predetermined effect process ends.

  If it is determined that the predetermined effect is to be executed (step S764; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to a time corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern in the predetermined effect timer. (Step S778), a predetermined effect is started (Step S779). Note that the processing in steps S778 and S779 is processing for starting a predetermined effect timer and controlling the effect devices such as the image display device 5 according to the contents of the process data (the same process as steps S535 and S536 in FIG. 37). is there. Then, effect control CPU 120 sets the predetermined effect executing flag (step S780), and ends the predetermined effect process.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a predetermined effect operation control process (see FIG. 46) and the like. Note that the Z value of the background (background image) is described as “10”, but in FIG. 48, the Z value of the background is assumed to be “11”.

  FIG. 48A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the predetermined effect operation control process (step S735B). In the predetermined effect operation control process shown in FIG. 48A, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed (step S9080). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed based on the value of the effect process flag and the received command. For example, when the value of the effect process flag is 1 or 2, or when the value of the effect process flag is 3 and before the design confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol variably. When it is determined that there is an effect, and the value of the effect process flag is 0, or when the value of the effect process flag is 3 and after the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (the decorative symbol is displayed). (It is not during variable display).

  When it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed (Step S9080; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the layer is higher (for example, Z value = 8) than the decorative symbol layer (Z value = 9). To execute (start and continue) the operation control of the predetermined effect (step S9081). Specifically, effect control CPU 120 displays a display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern set as the use pattern in the predetermined effect processing (see FIG. 46). A predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by transmitting the signal to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123. Then, the predetermined effect operation control process ends.

  If it is determined that the decorative symbol is not being variablely stopped (step S9080; NO), the effect control CPU 120 uses a lower layer (for example, Z value = 10) than the decorative symbol layer (Z value = 9). The operation control of the predetermined effect is executed (started, continued) (step S9082). Specifically, effect control CPU 120 displays a display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern set as the use pattern in the predetermined effect processing (see FIG. 46). A predetermined effect image (Z value = 10) corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by, for example, transmitting to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123. Then, the predetermined effect operation control process ends.

  FIG. 48B shows a predetermined effect image (an example). The predetermined effect image shown in FIG. 48A includes a roulette table image G16 for displaying a predetermined effect symbol (for example, displaying a result such as “可 変” or “X” after variable display; see FIG. 47), And an effect design image G17. The display time of the predetermined effect image (the execution time of the predetermined effect) is, for example, a time corresponding to the effect time according to the selected predetermined effect pattern. Note that the black arrow “↓” in the image G17 indicates that the predetermined effect symbol is changing. In the predetermined effect, when the image G17 indicating the result “〇” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed (the result “X” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed). In the case where the image G17 is displayed once and finally the image G17 indicating the result “同 様” is also displayed), the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. While the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is in the open state, the display is switched from the result “〇” to, for example, a word “opening”. Note that the result “〇” may be continuously displayed while the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. On the other hand, if the image G17 indicating the result “X” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed, the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is not controlled to the open state.

  FIGS. 48C and 48D are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. FIGS. 48C and 48D show display operations in time series. In FIG. 48C, an arrow (open arrow) “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. A black arrow “↓” in the image G17 indicates that the predetermined effect symbol is changing.

  FIG. 48 (C) shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is being performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48 (C) includes an image of a decorative design including a decorative design being variably displayed (Z value = 9) and an active display image G7 (active display M31). A display image (Z value = 5) including a reservation etc. display image (Z value = 5), a roulette table image G16, and a predetermined effect design image G17 are displayed.

  FIG. 48D illustrates a scene in which a predetermined effect is being performed during the stop display of the decorative symbol. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48 (D), an image of a decorative pattern including a decorative pattern being stopped and displayed (Z value = 9), an image G16 of a roulette table, and an image G17 of a predetermined effect symbol Is displayed (Z value = 10).

  In the above description, when the predetermined effect is performed during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the predetermined effect is executed on the back of the decorative symbol during the stop display, but the stop display is performed even during the stop display of the decorative symbol. After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, a lapse of one second) after that, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), a predetermined effect may be executed in front of the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 48 (E) shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is being performed during the stop display of the decorative symbol (after a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop display). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48 (E), an image of a decorative symbol including a decorative symbol being stopped and displayed (Z value = 9), an image G16 of a roulette table, and an image G17 of a predetermined effect symbol Is displayed (Z value = 8).

  As described above, the error notification image (FIG. 28 (A)), the effect execution notification image (FIG. 28 (B)), the character effect effect image (FIG. 28 (C)), the hold etc. display image (FIG. 29 (A)), Each of a group announcement effect image (FIG. 29 (B)), a chance zone effect image (FIG. 29 (C)), a step-up announcement effect image (FIG. 29 (D)), a predetermined effect image (FIG. 48 (B)), etc. Although the Z value of the image has been described, the Z value of another image other than the above will be described below.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a Z value or the like of another image. FIG. 49A shows a cumulative prize ball number notification image (an example) for reporting the cumulative prize ball number. The cumulative prize ball number notification image shown in FIG. 49 (A) includes a pictogram image G18 for notifying that a predetermined cumulative prize ball number (for example, 3000, 5000, 10,000, or the like) has been reached. It should be noted that the pictogram image G18 in FIG. 49A informs that the number has reached 5,000. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification image (the notification time of the cumulative prize ball number) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or until the end of the round. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification image may be varied according to the cumulative prize ball number to be reported.

  FIG. 49 (B) shows a prize ball number notification image (an example) for reporting the number of prize balls for each big hit. The prize ball number notification image shown in FIG. 49B includes a pictogram image G19 for notifying that a predetermined cumulative prize ball number (for example, 1000, 2000, or the like) has been reached. It should be noted that the pictogram image G19 in FIG. 49 (B) is for notifying that the number has reached 2,000. The display time of the prize ball number notification image (the notification time of the cumulative prize ball number) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or until the end of the round. The display time of the prize ball number notification image may be varied according to the number of prize balls to be notified.

  FIG. 49 (C) shows an effect image during opening (an example) displayed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. The effect image during opening shown in FIG. 49 (C) includes an image G20 for notifying the number of the current round and a frame image G21 for executing the effect during opening. In FIG. 49 (C), a character or the like is displayed as an effect during opening in the frame image G21, but is not shown.

  FIG. 49D shows the Z values set for the images shown in FIGS. 28A and 49A to 49C. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 49 (D), the cumulative prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the opening effect image, and the prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number notification image. An error notification image (see FIG. 28A) is displayed in front of the prize ball number notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example of FIG. For example, instead of FIG. 49 (D), a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (E), or a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (F). Alternatively, a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram or the like schematically showing layers of various images. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (D), an error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed on the foreground layer as shown in FIG. 50 (A). Then, the prize ball number notification image having the Z value “1” is displayed on a layer behind one of the error notification images, and the cumulative prize ball number notification image having the Z value “2” is one of the prize ball number notification images. The effect image during opening, which is displayed on the back layer and has a Z value of “3”, is displayed on the back layer of one of the cumulative prize ball number notification images. Further, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (D), when the error notification, the prize ball number notification, the cumulative prize ball number notification, and the effect during opening are overlapped, the image is displayed. Each image is displayed on the display area of the display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 51 is a conceptual diagram or the like schematically showing layers of various images. When the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (G), as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the cumulative prize ball number notification image having the Z value “0” is the foreground image. A prize ball number notification image having a Z value of “1” is displayed on a layer behind one of the cumulative prize ball number notification images, and an error notification image having a Z value of “2” is award ball number notification image. , And the effect image during opening having the Z value of “3” is displayed on the layer one behind the error notification image. Further, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (G), when the execution periods of the cumulative prize ball number notification, the prize ball number notification, the error notification, and the effect during opening are overlapped, Each image is displayed in the display area of the display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 52A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the round processing (step S175). In the description of FIG. 52A, it is assumed that a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49D. The flowchart of FIG. 52B will be described later.

  In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 52 (A), first, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a notification command after opening the special winning opening has been received (step S571).

  When it is determined that the notification command after the opening of the special winning opening has not been received (step S571; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the effect during opening in the fourth layer from the top (Z value = 3). (Start, Continue) (Step S572). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening set as the use pattern in the big hit start process (see FIG. 32) and the post-round process (see FIG. 32). By transmitting a display control command specified by the data to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, an opening effect image (see FIG. 49 (C)) corresponding to the opening effect is displayed.

  After executing the process of step S572, the effect control CPU 120 executes award ball number notification operation control process (step S573). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 adds the number of prize balls each time it receives a special winning opening prize notification command in the current jackpot game state, and the number of prize balls after addition is a predetermined number (for example, 1000, When the number reaches 2000, the operation control of informing the number of prize balls is executed (started and continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the second layer from the top (Z value = 1). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the prize ball number notification as a use pattern and displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The control unit 123 displays a prize ball number notification image (see FIG. 49 (B)) corresponding to the prize ball number notification by transmitting the data to the VDP or the like.

  After executing the process of step S573, the effect control CPU 120 executes an accumulated prize ball number notification operation control process (step S574). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the cumulative winning prize ball number every time the special winning opening prize notification command is received in a continuous big hit game state (a big hit game state in which the game is continuously changed without being in the normal state). Is added, and when the number of accumulated prize balls after the addition reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000, 5000, 10000, etc.), a third layer (Z value from the top) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) = 2), the operation control of the cumulative prize ball number notification is executed (started and continued). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the cumulative prize ball number notification as a use pattern, and sends a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The display control unit 123 displays a cumulative prize ball number notification image (see FIG. 49 (A)) corresponding to the cumulative prize ball number notification by transmitting the information to the VDP or the like. Then, the processing during the round ends. In addition, whether or not the normal state has been reached after the end of the big hit gaming state (whether or not the state has transited to the low-probability low-base state) is determined by receiving a game state designation command (designation for transition to the low-probability low-base state). The determination may be based on whether or not the effect control board 12 manages (counts) the number of STs (the number of times of change) or the number of time savings on the effect control board 12, similarly to the main board 11.

  When it is determined that the notification command after the opening of the special winning opening has been received (step S571; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect during closing (step S576), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the post-round processing. The value is updated to “6” (step S577), and the round ends.

  In the above description, the type of the jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the type of the jackpot, but the condition for determining the type of the jackpot is not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of or inside the special winning opening, and the type of the big hit may be determined based on a game ball entering (passing) into the specific area. Good. Specifically, for example, a certain-variable big hit may be determined based on a game ball having entered a specific area in the big hit game state. In addition, when the probability variation big hit is decided based on the game ball entering the specific territory, the decision of the probability variation big hit may be notified (probability variation decision notification).

  FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of the Z value and the like of another image. FIG. 53 (A) shows a probability change confirmation notification image (an example) for reporting the probability change big hit confirmation. The probable change confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 53A includes a character image G22 that reports the word “probable change!”.

  FIG. 53 (B) shows the Z value set in the probable change confirmation notification image shown in FIGS. 28 (A), 49 (A) to 49 (C), and FIG. 53 (A). According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 53B, the cumulative prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the opening effect image, and the prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number notification image. , A certainty-change confirmation notification image is displayed in front of the number-of-prize-balls notification image, and an error notification image is displayed in front of the certainty-change confirmation notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example of FIG. For example, a Z value may be set for each image as shown in any of FIGS. 53 (C) to 53 (G) instead of FIG. 53 (B).

  FIG. 54 is a conceptual diagram or the like schematically showing layers of various images. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 53B, an error notification image having a Z value of “0” is displayed on the foreground layer as shown in FIG. Then, a probable change confirmation notification image having a Z value of “1” is displayed on a layer behind one of the error notification images, and a prize ball number notification image having a Z value of “2” is a layer on the back of one of the probability change confirmation notification images. Is displayed on a layer behind one of the prize ball number notification images, and an open effect image having a Z value of "4" is displayed as a cumulative prize ball number notification image. It is displayed on one layer behind the image. When the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the execution periods of the error notification, the probability change confirmation notification image, the prize ball number notification, the cumulative prize ball number notification, and the opening effect are set. When they overlap, each image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 52 (B) is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process during a round (step S175) in a mode in which a probability change confirmed notification image is displayed when a probability change big hit is determined based on a game ball having entered a specific area. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 52B, the same processes as those in FIG. 52A are denoted by the same step numbers. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52 (B), in a mode in which a probability-change confirmed notification image is displayed when the probability-change big hit is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cumulative prize ball number notification operation control process (step S574). After that, a probable change confirmation notification operation control process is executed (step S575). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 receives a certain change confirmation notification command (not shown) transmitted from the main board 11 when the game medium passes through the specific area, and sets a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). A predetermined layer (for example, when a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the second layer from the top (Z value = 1), for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (C) As described above, when the Z value is set in each image, the operation control of the probability change confirmation notification is executed (started and continued) in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the probability change confirmation notification as a use pattern, and displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. By transmitting the data to the VDP or the like of the unit 123 or the like, a probability change confirmation notification image (see FIG. 53A) corresponding to the probability change confirmation notification is displayed.

  In the above description, the type of the effect effect effect image displayed in response to the operation of the movable accessory 17 is one type, but the effect effect effect image displayed in response to the operation of the movable accessory 17. May be two or more types. Further, in the case where there are two types of special effect effect images displayed in correspondence with the operation of the movable accessory 17, the same Z value may be set for the two types of special effect effect images, Different Z values may be set. In the case where there are three or more types of the special effect effect images displayed in correspondence with the operation of the movable character 17, the same Z value may be set for all the special effect effect images, or at least. A different Z value may be set for one type of the special effect effect image from the other special effect effect images.

  Further, in the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes one movable body (movable accessory 17), but may include two or more movable bodies. In an aspect including two or more movable bodies, each of the accessory effect effect images displayed corresponding to the operation of each of the movable bodies may be prepared. Further, the same Z value may be set for each of the above-mentioned character effect effect images, or different Z values may be set. For example, when there are two types of character effect effect images (for example, a character effect effect image a corresponding to the operation of the movable body A and a character effect effect image b corresponding to the operation of the movable body B), The same Z value may be set for the types of character effect effect images a and b, or different Z values may be set for the two types of character effect effect images a and b. Also, three types of character effect effect images (for example, a character effect effect image c corresponding to the operation of the movable body C, a character effect effect image d corresponding to the operation of the movable body D, and a motion corresponding to the operation of the movable body E) When there is a role effect effect image e), the same Z value may be set for all three types, different Z values may be set for all three types, or the same Z value may be set for two types. A different Z value (for example, 6) may be set for another type while setting a Z value (for example, 4). The same applies to a case where there are four or more types of character effect effect images. Further, when there are a plurality of character effect effect images in which the same Z value is set in an aspect including two or more movable bodies, the display area of each character effect effect image in which the same Z value is set is overlapped. It may not be. In other words, the same Z value may be set for the role effect effect images in which the display areas do not overlap.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (step S9063). In the display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 may be set. Specifically, when it is determined in the step-up notice effect determination process of step S530A that the step-up notice effect (SU5) is to be executed, the effect control pattern corresponding to SU5 is set in the process of setting the effect control pattern of step S532. May be set as a use pattern, and an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 may be set.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group announcement effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (S9067). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group announcement effect may be set. Specifically, when it is determined that the group announcement effect is to be executed in the group announcement effect determination process of step S530B, the effect control pattern corresponding to the group announcement effect is used in the process of setting the effect announcement pattern in step S532. And an effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the group announcement effect may be set.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the character effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (S9071). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the accessory effect may be set. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of super reach β, in the process of setting the effect control pattern of step S532, the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach β is set as a use pattern, and An effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the object effect may be set.

  In the above description, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, in the case of the number of notifications, the Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 that notifies the first effect in the notification start order is “3”, and the number of notifications is 2 or more. In the case of, the Z value of the pictogram image G3-2 for notifying the second effect in the notification start order is "2", and the pictogram image G3-3 for notifying the third effect in the notification start order in the case of one or more notifications. Of the pictogram image G3-1 is "1", the Z value of the pictogram image G3-2 is "2", and the Z value of the pictogram image G3-3 is "1". 3 ". That is, when displaying a plurality of effect execution notification images, a new one may be displayed lower (back) instead of a new upper one (front).

  Further, in the above description, the setting range of the Z value is 0 to 9 (or 0 to 10), but the setting range of the Z value is not limited to the above. Further, the Z value does not necessarily have to be an integer.

  Further, in the above description, the Z value of the step-up notice effect image is constant (Z value = 8) regardless of the number of steps (SU1 to SU5) (FIG. 27), but the Z value is varied according to the number of steps. You may. For example, the Z value of SU1 to SU3 may be set to 8, and the Z value of SU4 and SU5 may be set to 7.5. Further, in the above description, the display size of the step-up notice effect image is made large (FIG. 27), but the display size may be changed according to the number of steps. For example, the display size of SU1 to SU3 may be small, and the display size of SU4 and SU5 may be large.

  In addition, the chance zone effect may have a plurality of chance zones (low expectation zone, medium expectation zone, high expectation zone) having different degrees of expectation, and if the Z value differs according to the degree of expectation. You may let it. The transition from the low expectation zone to the middle expectation zone (or the high expectation zone) or the transition from the middle expectation zone to the high expectation zone may be possible. The Z value may be changed when shifting to a chance zone of another degree of expectation.

  Although FIG. 31B shows a scene in which all the seven types of images shown together with the Z value in FIG. 27 are displayed at the same time, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all the seven types of images at the same time. You may. Also, FIG. 50B shows a scene in which all four types of images shown together with the Z value in FIG. 49 are simultaneously displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all the four types of images at the same time. You may. FIG. 54B shows a scene in which all the five types of images shown together with the Z value in FIG. 53 are displayed simultaneously. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all the five types of images simultaneously. You may. It should be noted that “not simultaneously displayed” means that no effect or notification is executed (that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes only a part of the seven types of effects in FIG. 27A, or FIG. 49). 54 and FIG. 54, only a part of the notification of the number of prize balls, the cumulative number of prize balls, and the probability change confirmation notification is executed), when it cannot be displayed at the same time, or the effect or the notification is executed. This includes a case where the images cannot be displayed at the same time due to different timings. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to display the predetermined effect image shown in FIG. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to execute the predetermined effect processing shown in FIG.

  Although the seven types of images shown in FIG. 27 all have different Z values, at least some of the images may have the same Z value. The same applies to the images in FIGS. 49 and 53. When displaying images with the same Z value, they may not overlap each other. For example, when an image A having a certain Z value is displayed, an image B having the same Z value as the image A may not be displayed. Further, the display start timing of the image B may be delayed until the display end timing of the image A. Further, the image A may be hidden when the image B is displayed (that is, the display end timing of the image A may be advanced). Further, for example, by changing the display position or the display size of the image B (or by changing the display position or the display size of the image A, or changing the display position or the display size of the image A and the image B) ), The image A and the image B may not overlap.

  In the above description, an example in which an error notification image is displayed when a magnetic abnormality has occurred has been described (see FIG. 27), but other errors (for example, an error based on opening of a glass door, an error based on detection of vibration). , An error notification image may be displayed when the error occurs due to the lower plate being full). The Z value may be changed according to the type of error. For example, the Z value of the error based on the lower plate full may be set to a value between 3 and 4 (for example, 3.5), and the Z value of another error may be set to 0.

  In FIG. 27B, the Z value of the decorative symbol is set to 9, but the Z value of the symbol (always small symbol) displayed on the image display device 5 separately from the decorative symbol is a value between 0 and 1 ( For example, 0.5 or the like may be set, or the highest priority (Z value = 0) may be set. The small symbols do not always need to represent the reach state (the state in which all three symbols are displayed in a variable display, or the display in which all three symbols are stopped and displayed). May be expressed in either of the states.)

  In the above description, the Z value of the first effect execution notification image is set to 3, the Z value of the second effect execution notification image is set to 2, and the Z value of the third effect execution notification image is set to 1 ( (See FIG. 27) The first Z value may be set to 1, the second Z value may be changed from 1 to 2 when the second is displayed, and the second Z value may be set to 1. Further, when the third Z value is displayed, the first Z value may be changed from 2 to 3, the second Z value may be changed from 1 to 2, and the third Z value may be set to 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, there are a plurality of display timings of each of the plurality of effect execution notification images, and the display order of the effects to be notified is not constant. For example, in FIG. 44, the notification target effect (group notice) is displayed first, and in FIG. 45, the notification target effect (SU5) is displayed first. Although not shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, there may be a case where the effect to be notified (combination) is displayed first.

  In the above description, the effect to be notified of the effect execution notification is step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, a group notice effect, and a character effect, but other effects (for example, a title notice effect, a next notice effect). , A mini-character notice effect, a cut-in effect, etc.) may be set as the effect target information of the effect execution notification. Also, the notification target effect may be one type, two types, or four or more types. A mission achievement display using a mobile terminal (a mobile phone, a smartphone, or the like) may be displayed as an effect of effect execution notification.

  In FIG. 48, the relationship between the Z value of the predetermined effect image, the Z value of the decorative symbol during variable display, and the Z value of the decorative symbol during stop display (predetermined effect image, decorative symbol during variable display, stop display) Although the description has been given with respect to the priority order of the decorative symbols in the middle, the relationship with images other than the predetermined effect image may be the same. In other words, in FIG. 48, the Z value of the decorative symbol during the stop display <Z value of the predetermined effect image <Z value of the decorative symbol during the variable display (the priority order of the decorative symbol during the stop display> the priority order of the predetermined effect image) (The priority order of the decorative symbols during variable display), but the same relationship may be applied to other effect images. As an example, the Z value of the decorative symbol during variable display may be set to 9 (similar to FIG. 48), and the Z value of the decorative symbol during stop display may be set to a value between 0 and 1 (for example, 0.5 or the like). . As a result, the decorative design (Z value = 9) being variably displayed is displayed, for example, on the back of a display image (Z value = 5) or a chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) such as a hold display, and is stopped. The middle decorative pattern (Z value = 0.5) is displayed on the front of the display image such as a hold display image or the chance zone effect image. Further, the other effect images are not limited to those shown in FIG. 27 and the like, and include, for example, a demo image, a menu image, a music selection image, a music display image, a right strike notification image, a left strike back notification image, and the like. Is also good. In other words, it is possible to visually recognize the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed without being hindered by other effects. When the symbol stop command is received, the Z value of the decorative symbol is changed from 9 (first value) to 0.5 (second value) (for example, when the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in step S722). Etc.), and the Z value of the decorative symbol may be returned from 0.5 (second value) to 9 (first value) when the next variation pattern designation command is received. . As described with reference to FIG. 48 (E), the Z value of the decorative symbol is returned from 0.5 (second value) to 9 (first value) when a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop display. You may do so. The reason why the Z value of the decorative symbol during the stop display is set to a value between 0 and 1 is that the priority of the decorative symbol during the stop display is the priority following the error notification image.

  In the predetermined effect operation control process of FIG. 48, the Z value of the predetermined effect image is changed depending on whether the decorative symbol is being variably displayed or stopped and displayed. Similarly to the case, the Z value of the predetermined effect image is fixed (for example, 8), and the Z value of the decorative symbol is changed depending on whether the variable display is being performed or the stop display is being performed (for example, the Z value is being displayed during the variable display). = 9, Z value = 0.5 during stop display).

  In the above description, the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display are the same, but the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display may be different. For example, Z value of active display <Z value of pending display (priority of active display> priority of pending display). As an example, the Z value of the active display <the Z value of the super reach image <the Z value of the hold display (the priority of the active display> the priority of the super reach image> the priority of the hold display). Thus, for example, during super reach, the hold display may not be visible, but the active display may be visible. Note that the Z value of the small symbol (directive small symbol) displayed in a mode in which the decorative symbol is reduced during the super reach may be the same Z value as that of the active display, or the Z value between the active display and the super reach image. It may be a value.

  In the above description, the probability change confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability change big hit is determined based on the game ball entering the specific area in the big hit game state, but the probability change confirmation notification image is displayed as the probability change promotion effect image. You may make it. Further, instead of or in addition to the certainty change confirmation notification image, another image (for example, an image of a round number promotion effect, an image notifying of a game state) may be displayed. In addition, the image that informs about the game state includes, for example, an image that informs of an advantageous state (for example, an image that informs of a high base, an image that informs of a high base, a specific change pattern table (for example, And a table in which a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time shortened as the time saving control is selected or is easily selected.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a high base state, a high-accuracy state, and the like) that is advantageous to the player. Determining means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, processing for determining a special figure display result in the special symbol normal processing (step S240), processing for determining the type of big hit (step S242), and the like); Determining means for determining whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state before determining the means (for example, processing for determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the big hit determination in the winning random number determination processing (step S406), the process of determining the type of big hit (step S407), and the like, and effects using effect images (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, and the like). Effect execution means to be executed (for example, a chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, a step-up notice effect operation control process in step S544, etc.), and the effect execution means is based on the determination by the decision means. A first announcement effect (for example, a step-up announcement effect or the like) using a first effect image (for example, a step-up announcement effect image or the like) as the announcement effect to be executed, and an announcement effect to be executed based on the determination by the determination means. And a second announcement effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) using a second effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image) can be executed, and the second effect image is displayed in comparison with the first effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the chance zone effect image having the Z value “7” has the Z value “8”). It is displayed on the front side than the step-up announcement attraction image).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display diversified effect images.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a high base state, a high-accuracy state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, Determining means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, processing for determining a special figure display result in the special symbol normal processing (step S240), processing for determining the type of big hit (step S242), and the like); Determining means for determining whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state before determining the means (for example, processing for determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the big hit determination in the winning random number determination processing (step S406), the process of determining the type of big hit (step S407), and the like, and effects using effect images (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, and the like). Effect execution means to be executed (for example, a chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, a group announcement effect operation control process in step S545, etc.), and the effect execution device executes based on the determination by the decision means. A first notice effect (for example, a group notice effect, etc.) using a first effect image (for example, a group notice effect image, etc.) as the notice effect, and a second notice effect to be executed based on the determination by the determination means. A second announcement effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) using an effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image) can be executed, and the first effect image is prioritized in image display as compared with the second effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the group announcement effect image with the Z value “6” is displayed on the front side of the chance zone effect image with the Z value “7”). ).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display diversified effect images.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine for performing a game, and performs effects using effect images (for example, various effect images illustrated in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, and the like). (For example, a group announcement effect operation control process in step S545, a role item operation control process in step S546, etc.), and the effect execution unit interlocks with the operation of the movable body (movable accessory 17 and the like). (For example, a character effect effect image, etc.) using a linked image (for example, a character effect effect image, etc.) and a non-linked image (for example, displayed without being linked to the operation of the movable body) It is possible to execute a non-linked effect (for example, a group notice effect or the like) using a group notice effect image, and the linked image is set to have a higher priority of image display as compared to the non-linked image (for example, As shown in FIG. , Character object effect effect image Z value "4" is displayed on the front side of the group announcement attraction image Z value "6").

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display diversified effect images. It has been described that the linked image is displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body. However, the display start timing of the linked image and the operation start timing of the movable body do not necessarily need to coincide with each other. The display end timing and the operation end timing of the movable body do not necessarily have to match. In other words, an image with a display time that does not match the operation time of the movable body may be included in the linked image. For example, an image displayed before the start of the operation of the movable body and informing the player that the movable body is operating, and an image displayed after the end of the operation of the movable body and giving the lingering sound of the operation of the movable body to the player are also linked images. included. Further, the display content of the linked image may be a display content that matches the shape, operation, and the like of the movable body (for example, the display content of the linked image illustrated in FIG. Although the combined circular effect image G4 is used), the display content of the linked image does not have to be the display content that matches the shape and operation of the movable body. In other words, an image of display content that does not match the shape, operation, or the like of the movable body may be included in the linked image. For example, when the movable body operates, if the image is an image related to the operation of the movable body (an image in which the operation of the movable body is announced, supplemented, emphasized, and the like), the display content irrelevant to the shape and operation of the movable body is displayed. Even images are included in linked images.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols), and stores the variable display that has not yet started as hold information. Holding storage means (for example, a first special drawing holding storage unit 151A, a second special drawing holding storage unit 151B, a first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.), and the holding storage Holding display means (for example, processing (steps S162 and S165) for adding a hold display in a prize-winning effect determination processing) for displaying a hold image (for example, a hold or other display image) corresponding to the hold information stored in the means; In the variable display start setting process, the process of using the reserved display (step S531) and the effect image (for example, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 4) And the like (for example, the role action control process of step S546), and the effect execution means includes a movable body (movable role). 17), a linked effect (for example, a character effect effect image, etc.) displayed using a linked image (for example, a character effect effect image, etc.) can be executed, and the linked image is the reserved image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, a character effect effect image with a Z value of “4” is higher than a display image with a Z value of “5” such as a hold image). Displayed on the front side).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display diversified effect images.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine for performing a game, and performs effects using effect images (for example, various effect images illustrated in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, and the like). (For example, a group announcement effect operation control process in step S545, a chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, etc.), and the effect execution unit includes a first region (as shown in FIG. 27A). The first effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) using the first effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) in an image size “small” region, and a second region (FIG. 27) wider than the first region A second effect (for example, a group notice effect, etc.) using a second effect image (for example, a group notice effect image, etc.) can be executed in an image size “large” area as shown in FIG. 2 production Has a higher priority of image display than the first effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a group preview effect image with a Z value of “6” has a chance zone with a Z value of “7”). It is displayed on the front side of the effect image).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display diversified effect images. It is sufficient that the second effect image has a higher priority of image display than the first effect image, and the first effect image or the second effect image is a chance zone effect image or a group notice effect image. Not limited. For example, as the first effect image (or the second effect image), an error notification image, a display image such as suspension, an effect effect effect image, a step-up notice effect image, a predetermined effect image, a positive change confirmation notification image, a prize ball number notification. An image, a cumulative number of prize balls notification image may be displayed, or another image (demo image, menu image, music selection image, right-hit notification image, left-turn notification image, promotion image, small design image, etc.) may be displayed. , May be displayed as a first effect image (or a second effect image).

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine for performing a game, and performs effects using effect images (for example, various effect images illustrated in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, and the like). (For example, a chance zone effect operation control process of step S543, a step-up notice effect operation control process of step S544, etc.), and the effect execution unit includes a first region (see FIG. 27A). As described above, a first effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) using a first effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) in an image size “small” region, and a second region (FIG. A second effect (for example, a step-up notice performance) using a second effect image (for example, a step-up notice effect image or the like) in an image size “large” area as shown in FIG. And the like, and the first effect image is set to have a higher priority of image display than the second effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the chance of the Z value “7”). The zone effect image is displayed on the front side of the step-up notice effect image of the Z value “8”).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display diversified effect images. It is sufficient that the first effect image has a higher priority of image display than the second effect image, and the first effect image and the second effect image include a chance zone effect image and a step-up notice effect image. It is not limited to. For example, as the first effect image (or the second effect image), an error notification image, a display image such as suspension, an effect effect effect image, a step-up notice effect image, a predetermined effect image, a positive change confirmation notification image, a prize ball number notification. An image, a cumulative number of prize balls notification image may be displayed, or another image (demo image, menu image, music selection image, right-hit notification image, left-turn notification image, promotion image, small design image, etc.) may be displayed. , May be displayed as a first effect image (or a second effect image).

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a notification unit (for example, an error notification process in step S75 or the like) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 and the like). The means can notify an error using an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28), and the error notification image is set to have a higher priority of image display as compared to the effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image with the Z value “0” is displayed on the front side of the character effect effect image with the Z value “4”, for example).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, it is possible to suitably display the effect image without interrupting the error notification.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a notifying unit (for example, an effect execution notifying operation control process in step S547) for executing a notification using a notifying image (for example, various notifying images shown in FIG. 28 and the like). When the specific effect (for example, step 5 (SU5) of a step-up notice effect, a group notice effect, a character effect effect, etc.) is executed, the information means indicates that the specific effect has been executed. For example, it is possible to notify using an effect execution notification image or the like, and the information images are set with a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the effect execution notification image has a Z value of “1”). To “3” are set).

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the information image can be improved.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect executing means is configured to display a first interlocked image (for example, a character effect effect image) displayed in conjunction with an operation of a first movable body (for example, the above-described movable body A or the like). A first interlocking effect using a) and a second interlocking image (for example, a character effect effect image b) displayed in conjunction with the operation of the second movable body (for example, the above-described movable body B) are used. A second linked effect can be executed, and the first linked image may be set to a different priority from the second linked image (for example, as described above, the role effect effect image a and the role A different Z value may be set for the object effect effect image b).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the effect images according to the movable bodies can be suitably displayed in different priorities.

  In addition, the first linked image may have the same priority as the second linked image (for example, as described above, the same effect effect effect image a and the same effect effect image b may be set to the same effect image). May be set).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, an effect image corresponding to a movable body can be suitably displayed with the same priority.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs variable display means for variably displaying identification information (for example, a decorative pattern or the like) (for example, a process of setting an effect control pattern corresponding to a variation pattern in a variable display start setting process as a use pattern ( (Step S532) and a process of variably displaying decorative symbols based on the effect control pattern set in the variable display effect process (Step S542), and the effect execution means is in a state in which the game medium is likely to win ( For example, a predetermined effect image (for example, the predetermined effect image in FIG. 48B) as an effect for notifying that the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the like) is controlled in the high base state or the like. (For example, a predetermined effect performed in the predetermined effect processing shown in FIG. 46) can be executed, and the predetermined effect image The priority of image display is set higher than the identification information at least during the predetermined period during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the predetermined effect image is The image display priority is set lower than the identification information at least in a predetermined period during the stop display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48D, decoration is performed). During the stop display of the symbol, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer lower than the decorative symbol).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the predetermined effect image can be suitably displayed according to whether the identification information is being displayed variably or stopped.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provides a notification unit (for example, the notification of the number of prize balls in step S573) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, and the like). Operation control processing, the accumulated prize ball number notification operation control processing in step S574, etc.), and the notification means uses a first value notification image (for example, a prize ball number notification image or the like) for a specific period (each time a big hit). (For example, in the normal state) by using the magnitude of the value (for example, the number of prize balls per the jackpot) acquired in the gaming state and the second value notification image (for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification image). It is possible to report the magnitude of the value (e.g., the cumulative number of prize balls per jackpot in the consecutive chans, etc.) acquired in the jackpot game state that is continuously shifting without any change. Different from the second value notification image Priority is set that (for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), are set different Z value and the cumulative prize counts notification image for prize balls number notification image).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs a notification unit (for example, an error notification process in step S75) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images illustrated in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, and the like). , An award ball number informing operation control process in step S573, a cumulative award ball number informing operation control process in step S574, etc.), and the informing unit provides an error informing image (for example, the error informing image shown in FIG. 28). And the magnitude of the value (for example, the number of prize balls) acquired using the value notification image (for example, the prize ball number notification image, the accumulated prize ball number notification image, etc.) can be reported. A different priority is set for the notification image and the value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D, the error notification image is different from the prize ball number notification image and the accumulated prize ball number notification image. Z value is set ).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs a notification unit (for example, an error notification process in step S75) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images illustrated in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, and the like). , The probability change confirmation notification operation control process in step S575, etc.), and the notification means uses an error notification image (eg, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28) to generate an error and a state notification image (eg, FIG. 53). (For example, an image notifying that a specific fluctuation pattern table is to be referred to, etc.), a probability change state after completion of the jackpot game state, and the like. , And control to a high base state or the like after the end of the big hit game state), and a different priority is set for the error notification image and the state notification image. It may be those who are (e.g., as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the error notification image is set different Z value from the probability variation determined notification image).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  In addition, the small symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the priority of the image display may be set higher in the small symbol image than in the effect image. . For example, the priority of the image display may be set higher for the small symbol image than for the error notification image (excluding the error notification image for notifying a serious error that causes the game to stop).

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above. However, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various rendering operations including the rendering image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is three colors of white, yellow, and red (see FIG. 35), but the display mode of the hold display is not limited to this. For example, other three colors (for example, three colors of white, blue, and red, and three colors of gray, light blue, and purple) different from the above three colors (white, yellow, and red) may be used. Two, four or more colors may be used. Further, patterns, shapes, and sizes may be different. The same applies to the active display. A similar effect can be obtained by such a configuration. In addition, there may be a display mode dedicated to the active display that is not displayed as the hold display. Thereby, interest is improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the time of shift, but the display mode of the hold display may be changed at another timing instead of or in addition to the shift. For example, it may be changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The same applies to the active display. A similar effect can be obtained by such a configuration. In addition, interest is improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display are determined simultaneously (by one determination), but may be determined separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment, at the time of winning, the display form of the hold display at each display position is collectively determined. However, the display form of the hold display after the shift may be determined each time a shift is made. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the active display is determined at the time of winning, but the display mode of the active display may be determined when displaying in the active display area AHA. A similar effect can be obtained by such a configuration.

  Further, in the above embodiment, whether it is a super reach (losing) (variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”) or a super reach (big hit) (variation pattern “PB4-X”) Or “PB5-X”), the determination ratio of whether to execute the step-up notice effect is made different (see FIG. 38 (A)), but it is super reach α (variation pattern “PA4-X”). ) Or “PB4-X”) or Super Reach β (whether the variation pattern is “PA5-X” or “PB5-X”), and if the determination ratio of whether to execute the step-up notice effect is different. You may let it. The same applies to the determination ratio of the step-up announcement effect pattern and the determination ratio of the group announcement effect. It should be noted that by making the determination ratio different depending on whether it is a super-reach (losing) or a super-reach (big hit), it can be more strongly suggested that a big hit will occur. On the other hand, by making the determination ratio different depending on whether it is the super-reach α or the super-reach β, it is possible to more strongly suggest which super-reach is to be performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, whether or not to perform an effect such as a hold is determined according to a non-specific pattern (losing), a specific pattern (losing), a non-specific pattern (big hit), or a specific pattern (big hit). Instead of a specific pattern (losing), a specific pattern (losing), a non-specific pattern (big hit), or a specific pattern (big hit), whether or not to perform an effect such as a hold is determined according to the variation category shown in FIG. You may decide. The same applies to the determination of an effect pattern such as a hold. In a mode in which the presence or absence of an effect such as holding is determined according to the variation category, for example, the variation category shown in FIG. 20A is determined at the time of winning, and the variation category command corresponding to the determined variation category is determined. Should be sent.

  In the above-described embodiment, the step-up notice effect and the group notice effect are exemplified as the main notice effect. However, other effects (for example, a title notice effect, a next notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a cut-in effect, and the like) are used. You may. A similar effect can be obtained by such a configuration.

  In the above embodiment, the change category determination table for the big hit (see FIGS. 20 (C) and (D)) is common to the number of retained storages “0” to “4”. As in the case of the tables (see FIGS. 20A and 20B) and the like, the data may be divided by the number of reserved storages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the hold data (hold information) is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, the hold data (hold information) is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. Although the reserved data is digested with priority (see FIG. 18), of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151S and the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B, the data in the order of the winning order is reserved. The data may be digested. For example, a sorting device may be provided, and the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be alternately won, and the retained data may be digested in the order of winning.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to a relation such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10, and is not limited to that shown in FIG. (B), FIG. 38 (B), etc., a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0 (ie, 100% or 0% allocation exists).

  In the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two, that is, eight rounds and sixteen rounds. However, the number of rounds may be three or more. For example, there may be three types of 4R probability change jackpot, 8R probability change hit, and 16R probability change hit. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the big hit type is provided as the big hit type is shown, but a gaming machine including a non-probable variable big hit (normal big hit) as the big hit type may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the mode in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is described. Is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special symbol to be variably displayed may be different from a special symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result. In other words, a special symbol that is not included in the plurality of types of fluctuating special symbols may be derived and displayed as a variable display result, or a special symbol that is not specially derived and displayed as a variable display result among a plurality of types of fluctuating special symbols. May be included. Also, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and a mode in which variable display is executed using only one type of special symbol may be used. As the variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (lighting / extinguishing may be repeated alternately). That is, the repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lighted) last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be. The same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit game state is controlled based on the big hit symbol being displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. The mode of performing is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided near the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and a big hit game state is controlled based on a game ball entering (passing) into the specific area. You may be in.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time, a type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-run, one variation pattern designation command is used when the variation is started. Has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a slide effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode after 2 stops) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control notifies the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and a specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 12. Is also good. When two commands are sent, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is sent, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. As described above, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 11 stores a random number determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and fluctuation category determination table), and the random number determination table is extracted from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random number determination table and determines the random number value (determines whether or not a big hit will occur, determines a variation category, and determines whether a big hit has occurred). The example shows that the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined in the main board 11 and executes a prefetch notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the prefetch notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the random number determination table is stored in the effect control board 12, and the random number itself is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying the random number from the main board 11). Is transmitted to the effect control board 12), the effect control board 12 receives the random number itself extracted in the main board 11, and refers to the random number determination table based on the received random number to determine the random number value. May be executed, and a prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the judgment result of the judgment process. That is, the random number value determination processing may be performed in the effect control board 12. Further, the determination process of the random number value may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random number value, execute the process of determining the random number value, and also receive the determination result determined by the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 12 receives the random numbers (MR1 and MR2), determines whether or not a big hit is to be made, and if it is a big hit, determines the type of the big hit. The determination result of the fluctuation category determined by the main board 11 based on (MR3) may be received. That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the prefetch notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main substrate 11.

  Further, the random numbers may be updated at different timings or the update ranges of the random numbers may be changed so that the random numbers are not synchronized.

  In addition, for example, using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a gaming machine that gives a game score for use in the game The present invention can be applied. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a gaming ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a gaming area.

  Further, in the above description, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. It is not always necessary to store the information in a table format (for example, including a structure, an array, and the like). That is, the determination value (determined value) to be compared with the extracted random number value may be collectively stored in the ROM 101, or may be stored in a distributed manner (scattered) at a plurality of locations in the ROM 101. Alternatively, a formula or a program that outputs a result (for example, a jackpot or a loss in the example of FIG. 6) when the extracted random number value is input may be stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine. However, a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with an operation of an operation lever by a player. If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  For example, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and uses a staging image (various images displayed on a liquid crystal screen provided in the slot machine) to staging (for example, whether a bonus or the like is established or not established). Related effects, etc.), wherein the effect executing means includes a linked effect using a linked image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body (the movable body of the slot machine); It is possible to execute a non-linked effect using a non-linked image that is displayed without being linked to the operation of the movable body, and the linked image is set to a higher priority for image display than the non-linked image. It may be. The non-linked image is an image that is displayed without being linked to the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the non-linked image is an image having a higher appearance frequency or an image giving information with a lower importance than the linked image. For example, a green image corresponding to weak watermelon, a push order navigation image, and the like are examples of the non-linked image. The linked image is an image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the linked image is an image with a low appearance frequency or an image giving information with a high degree of importance as compared with the non-linked effect. For example, a red image corresponding to strong cherry, an image relating to addition, an image of “Aim for 7!”, A movie image at the time of freezing, and the like are examples of the linked image.

  For example, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and uses a staging image (various images displayed on a liquid crystal screen provided in the slot machine) to staging (for example, whether a bonus or the like is established or not established). Effect producing means for executing various related effects, etc., wherein the effect producing means uses a first effect image in a first region (for example, a weak watermelon corresponding effect using a weak watermelon corresponding image). And a second effect using the second effect image in a second area wider than the first area (e.g., a strong watermelon-compatible effect using a strong watermelon-compatible image. The image size of the strong watermelon-compatible image is smaller than that of the weak watermelon-compatible image). The second effect image may be a slot machine in which the priority of image display is set higher than that of the first effect image. Further, the first effect image may be a slot machine in which image display priority is set higher than the second effect image.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the server. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... First start winning storage storage display area 5HR ... Second start winning storage storage display area 5H ... Start winning Memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16… Actor control board 17… Movable accessory 20… Normal symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A… First starting port switch 22B… Second starting port switch 23… Count switch 31A… Stick controller 31B… Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101 and 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit 126 ... RTC circuit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A specific display means for displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state,
Determining means for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state prior to the determination of the determining means,
Effect execution means for executing an effect using the effect image,
With
The specific display includes a hold display and a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display being executed,
The specific display can be changed to a high expectation mode controlled to the advantageous state,
The ratio of the timing at which the specific display mode changes differs according to the variable display mode,
The degree of expectation that the mode of the hold display changes is controlled to the advantageous state,
The effect executing means includes a first effect using a first effect image in a first area, and a second effect image having a higher display priority than the first effect image in a second area wider than the first area. A second effect to be used can be executed, and a process for displaying the first effect image is executed even when the second effect is executed,
Displaying the second effect image on the near side,
A gaming machine characterized by that: